Citel | EXTender 6000 | Product specifications | Citel EXTender 6000 Product specifications

Quality is our job. Customer satisfaction is our mission!
PBXgatewayTM & EXTenderTM 6000
System Administrator’s Guide
M-6000-MUM Rev AC
March 13, 20056
Copyright © 2001, 1999-2000, MCK Communications
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
November 2004
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time
of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security
Toll fraud is the use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party, for example, persons
other than your company’s employees, agents, subcontractors, or persons working on your company’s
behalf. Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system and, if
toll fraud occurs, it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services.
You and your system manager are responsible for the security of your system, such as programming and
configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use. The system manager is also responsible for
reading all installation, instruction, and system administration documents provided with this product in
order to fully understand the features that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken
to reduce that risk. Citel Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent
unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or
connected to it. Citel Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such
unauthorized use.
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
i
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
ii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ......................................................................................................................................iii
Lifeline or 911 Phone Notice ..................................................................................................................... 2
Important Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................. 3
Protection of the Environment – The WEEE Directive .......................................................................... 4
About This Manual ................................................................................................................................. 6
Product Overview........................................................................................................................................ 7
Features................................................................................................................................................. 8
Compatible Remote Units ...................................................................................................................... 8
What is the EXTender™ 4000 for IP? .................................................................................................... 8
Types of Network Connections.............................................................................................................. 9
Connections vs. Remotes .................................................................................................................... 10
Compatible Telephones ....................................................................................................................... 11
Typical Installation ............................................................................................................................... 13
Synchronous-Serial Connection .......................................................................................................... 14
Asynchronous-Serial Connection ........................................................................................................ 15
Voice Over IP (RVP__Over_IP)........................................................................................................... 16
Digital Telephone/PBX Features ......................................................................................................... 17
Call Suspend ........................................................................................................................................... 18
Call Suspend Modes............................................................................................................................ 19
Using ConneX...................................................................................................................................... 19
Fax Traffic (DEFINITY and Meridian) .................................................................................................. 21
Voice Compression vs. Bandwidth ...................................................................................................... 22
Physical Characteristics....................................................................................................................... 23
Configuration and Management .......................................................................................................... 24
Diagnostic Capabilities......................................................................................................................... 24
Chapter 1: Product Specifications .......................................................................................................... 25
Specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 26
Chapter 2: Installation .............................................................................................................................. 27
Safety Checklist ................................................................................................................................... 28
Hardware Components ........................................................................................................................ 29
Pre-Installation Requirements ............................................................................................................. 30
Installation............................................................................................................................................ 33
Wiring Information................................................................................................................................ 37
Compatible Remote Units .................................................................................................................... 39
Connecting the Remote Unit to the User phones ................................................................................ 39
Before you Power-Up the PBXgateway and EXTender 6000 ............................................................. 41
Chapter 3: Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 42
Connecting to the PBXgateway ........................................................................................................... 43
What a System Administrator Must Know ........................................................................................... 43
Connecting to the Management Interface (MI) .................................................................................... 44
Internet Access .................................................................................................................................... 45
Telnet Connection................................................................................................................................ 46
Welcome Screen.................................................................................................................................. 47
Help Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 48
Typical Menu........................................................................................................................................ 49
PBXgateway Menu Items and Structure.............................................................................................. 52
Remote Unit Menu Items and Structure .............................................................................................. 53
Remote Unit Menu Structure................................................................................................................... 54
Network Environments ............................................................................................................................ 54
Synchronous-Serial Device Configuration (RVP_Direct)..................................................................... 55
Asynchronous-Serial Device Configuration (RVP_Direct)................................................................... 57
IP Network Configuration (RVP_Over_IP)........................................................................................... 59
Setting PBXgateway and EXTender Parameters.................................................................................... 61
Port Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 62
Setting Voice Parameters (Gateway Only) .......................................................................................... 63
Calculating Jitter and Compression ..................................................................................................... 63
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
iii
Setting the IP Parameters (Gateway and Remote) ............................................................................. 76
Telnet/FTP Set up (Gateway and Remote) ......................................................................................... 78
System Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 82
Utilities (Gateway and EXTender) ....................................................................................................... 85
Optional PBXgateway Parameters.......................................................................................................... 88
2:1 Configuration.................................................................................................................................. 88
Simultaneous Direct and Telnet Connections to the MI ...................................................................... 91
Zmodem Connection............................................................................................................................ 91
Setting up Call-Suspend (Gateway and Remote)................................................................................ 94
Enabling ConneX ................................................................................................................................. 99
ConneX Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 102
Configuring the SMTP Server (Gateway Only).................................................................................. 103
Console Setup Wizard (Gateway and EXTender) ............................................................................. 104
Login to Alternate Remote Unit (Gateway) ........................................................................................ 105
Remote Unit Configuration .................................................................................................................... 106
Direct Serial Connection (RVP_Direct).............................................................................................. 106
IP Connection (RVP_Over_IP) – Remote Only ................................................................................. 107
Customizing Individual Ports (Gateway and Remote) ....................................................................... 109
Setting up the Analog Port (Remote Only) ........................................................................................ 112
System Reboot (Gateway and Remote) ............................................................................................ 114
Chapter 4: The Management Interface (MI) .......................................................................................... 117
Gateway & Remote Menus ................................................................................................................... 119
Remote Menus................................................................................................................................... 127
MI Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 128
Chapter 5: Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 146
Baseline Checklist.............................................................................................................................. 148
Status LEDs ....................................................................................................................................... 150
System Status LEDs .......................................................................................................................... 153
Port Status LEDs ............................................................................................................................... 154
Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................................................................... 156
Echo Problems................................................................................................................................... 162
Management Interface (MI) Status Menus ........................................................................................ 163
Remote Phone Messages ................................................................................................................. 171
Chapter 6: File Management and System Upgrades ........................................................................... 172
Configuration File Management......................................................................................................... 174
Upgrading the Software......................................................................................................................... 177
Upgrading the Software......................................................................................................................... 177
Chapter 7: Glossary ................................................................................................................................ 190
Appendix A: Management Interface (MI) Menus .................................................................................. 199
Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 200
Port Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 201
WAN Menu (WAN 1 & WAN 2).......................................................................................................... 203
Connect Menu (R).............................................................................................................................. 204
Analog Card (G) & (B)........................................................................................................................ 204
RVP_Direct Menu (R) ........................................................................................................................ 205
RVP_over_IP Menu (R) ..................................................................................................................... 206
Log Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 207
IP Menu.............................................................................................................................................. 208
SNMP Menu....................................................................................................................................... 209
Syslog Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 209
System Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 210
Utilities Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 211
Set Date Menu ................................................................................................................................... 212
Diagnostics Menu .............................................................................................................................. 213
Appendix B: Bandwidth Requirements ................................................................................................ 214
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 215
Voice Compression............................................................................................................................ 216
Selecting the Proper Voice Compression .......................................................................................... 217
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
iv
Appendix C: EXTender 6000 Phone-Set Interface ............................................................................... 218
Phone-Set Interface ........................................................................................................................... 219
Phone-Set Interface ........................................................................................................................... 219
Appendix D: SNMP.................................................................................................................................. 221
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 222
MI Status Menu vs. MIB Group Table................................................................................................ 223
MIB Group Tables.............................................................................................................................. 225
SNMP Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 235
Using SNMP to Monitor & Troubleshoot Problems ........................................................................... 239
Appendix E: Log Messages ................................................................................................................... 242
Log Messages.................................................................................................................................... 243
Appendix F: ConneX Application Guide............................................................................................... 248
Personal ConneX Information............................................................................................................ 249
Using ConneX.................................................................................................................................... 250
Programming Your Mobile Phone...................................................................................................... 251
Operation Modes ............................................................................................................................... 252
Operating Your Mobile Phone ........................................................................................................... 252
ConneX Mobile Application Commands - DEFINITY ........................................................................ 255
ConneX Mobile Application Commands - Meridian ........................................................................... 256
ConneX Mobile Application Commands - Norstar ............................................................................. 257
Getting Started on a RemoteConneX Phone .................................................................................... 258
Dialback Instructions.......................................................................................................................... 258
Making and Answering a Call ............................................................................................................ 259
Using Active Call Commands – Remote ConneX ............................................................................. 260
PBX:Admin Menu............................................................................................................................... 261
PBX:Voice Mail Menu ........................................................................................................................ 261
Using Active Call Commands – Mobile ConneX ............................................................................... 261
Appendix G: PBX/KSU ConneX Configuration .................................................................................... 263
Norstar KSU ConneX Configuration...................................................................................................... 264
Voice Mail .......................................................................................................................................... 264
KSU Configuration – Line Assignment Method ................................................................................. 264
KSU Configuration - ConneX_Session Port ...................................................................................... 265
Definity PBX ConneX Configuration...................................................................................................... 267
SCENARIO #1: Office Phone Used in Conjunction with the ConneX Phone.................................... 267
SCENARIO #2: Only ConneX Phone Is Used ................................................................................... 268
Meridian PBX ConneX Configuration .................................................................................................... 268
SCENARIO #1: Office Phone Used in Conjunction with the ConneX Phone.................................... 268
SCENARIO #2: Only Mobile Phone Is Used ..................................................................................... 269
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
v
Regulatory – Compliance and Agency Approval
This equipment complies with or has obtained Regulatory Agency approval at least against the following
standards:
EMC - Emission
EMC - Immunity
Safety
FCC CFR 47 Part 15
EN 55022 (1998) + Amendments A1 + A2
EN 55024 (1998) + Amendments A1 + A2
EN 60950 (2000)
UL 60950-1
CSA C22.2 N° 60950-1
Compliance and Regulatory Statements
1. EN55022 and CISPR22 statement
This is a Class B product.
2. FCC Part 15 Statement
This digital equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
1
Problems, Repair and Warranty
Should you experience trouble with this telephone equipment or for repair or warranty information, please
contact Customer Support, at 1-888-454-5828. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect this equipment from the line network
until the problem has been corrected.
3. Industry Canada Statements
This digital equipment does not exceed Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital
apparatus, set out in Radio Interference Regulation of the Industry Canada. Operation in a residential
area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception requiring the owner or operator
to take whatever steps necessary to correct the interference.
4. Notice d'Industrie Canada
Cet équipement n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils
numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique établi par
l’Industrie Canada. L'exploitation faite en milieu résidentiel peut entraîner le brouillage des réceptions
de radio et de télévision, ce qui obligerait le propriétaire ou l'opérateur à prendre les dispositions
nécessaires
pour en éliminer les causes.
Making Changes or Modifications
Any changes and modifications not expressly approved by Citel Technologies. will void any
Compliance and regulatory approval, and will void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Lifeline or 911 Phone Notice
!
CAUTION: THIS IS NOT A LIFELINE or 911 PHONE.
If you dial 911 on your display telephone, when the telephone is connected to the Remote unit and linked
to the PBXgateway, you will reach the 911 facility that serves the location of the corporate facility and not
the location of your Remote unit. To ensure that you reach the correct 911 service for your area, use a
telephone connected locally.
Note: Branch Office EXTender™ 6000 Remote units provide an analog port for local dialing.
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
2
Important Safety Instructions
The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user
to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
!
To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, and injury to persons when installing telephone equipment,
always follow basic safety precautions including:
•
Read and understand all instructions.
•
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on or packed with the product.
•
Never install this unit, or the telephone wiring for it, during a lightning storm.
•
Never install a telephone jack in a wet location unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
•
Never touch non-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been
disconnected at the network interface.
•
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
•
Do not install this product near water, for example, in a wet basement location.
•
Do not overload wall outlets, as this can result in the risk of fire or electrical shock.
•
Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces. Do not allow anything to rest on the
power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it.
•
Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Do not use
cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
•
Do not operate the system if chemical gas leakage is suspected in the area. Use telephones
located in some other safe area to report the trouble.
!
DO NOT open the PBXgateway or Branch Office units. There are no user serviceable parts inside. Only
an authorized technician should open the unit for required maintenance or upgrading purposes.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
3
Protection of the Environment – The WEEE Directive
This equipment is marked according to the European directive 2002/96/EC on Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE). By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent
potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be
caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
This symbol on this equipment indicates that this appliance may not be treated as
household waste. Instead it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for
the recycling of Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Disposal must be carried out in accordance with local environmental regulations for
waste disposal.
For more detailed information about treatment, recovery and recycling of this product,
please contact your local city office or your household waste disposal service.
Support
Telephone
Number
Call the MCK Communications Helpline (at 1-888-454-5828), or your authorized
dealer if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.
Ask for customer service. Outside the United States or Canada, contact your local
MCK Communications representative.
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
4
Security of
Your System:
Preventing
Toll Fraud
As a customer of a new telephone system, you should be aware that there is an
increasing problem of telephone toll fraud. Telephone toll fraud can occur in many forms,
despite the concerted efforts of telephone companies and telephone equipment
manufacturers to control it. Some individuals use electronic devices to prevent or falsify
records of these calls. Others charge calls to someone else’s number by illegally using
lost or stolen calling cards, billing innocent parties, clipping on to someone else’s line, or
breaking into someone else’s telephone equipment physically or electronically. In certain
instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telephone network through
the use of remote access features.
Common carriers are required by law to collect their tariff charges. While these charges
are fraudulent charges made by persons with criminal intent, applicable tariffs state that
the customer of record is responsible for payment of all long-distance or other network
charges. Verso Technologies, Inc. cannot be responsible for such charges and will not
make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your Verso Technologies, Inc.
PBXgateway, when possible, restrict the off-network capability of off-premises callers,
using calling restrictions, Facility Restriction Levels, and Disallowed List capabilities.
When possible, block out-of-hours calling through Time-of-Day Routing. Frequently
monitor system call detail reports for quicker detection of any unauthorized or abnormal
calling patterns.
Limit out-calling to persons on a need-to-have basis.
The Verso Technologies, Inc. PBXgateway, through proper administration, can help you
reduce the risk of unauthorized persons gaining access to the network. However,
telephone numbers and authorization codes can be compromised when overheard in a
public location, lost through theft of a wallet or purse containing access information, or
when treated carelessly (writing codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding
them).
Additionally, hackers may use a computer to dial an access code and then publish the
information to other hackers. Substantial charges can accumulate quickly. It is your
responsibility to take appropriate steps to implement the features properly, to evaluate
and administer the various restriction levels, and to protect and carefully distribute
access codes.
Under applicable tariffs, you will be responsible for payment of toll charges. Verso
Technologies, Inc. cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit resulting from unauthorized access.
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
5
About This Manual
Intended Audience
This manual is intended to help with the installation, configuration, and troubleshooting of the
PBXgateway and compatible remote units. Additional information is provided for Remote products, which
can be ‘mixed & matched’ to communicate with the PBXgateway depending on the clients’ needs. This
document is intended for use by anyone needing such information, including system administrators,
support personnel, and technicians.
Terms and Conventions
The PBXgateway™ is a multi-user device and is henceforth referred to as the PBXgateway, Gateway or
Switch unit.
The Remote products are henceforth referenced as follows:
The Branch Office EXTender™ 6000 is multi-user device and is henceforth referred to as the EXTender
6000 or Branch Office unit.
The EXTender™ 4000 is a single client device and is henceforth referred to as the EXTender 4000.
The Management Interface is henceforth referred to as the MI.
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
6
Product Overview
The following section provides a product overview for the PBXgateway including; a Product Feature List,
Voice Compression vs. Bandwidth Requirements, Typical Installation Information, a Management
Interface (MI) Overview, and Diagnostic Information.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
7
Product
Summary
Single Users
MultipleUsers
The PBXgateway is a multi-user telephony device enabling remote teleworkers
seamless connectivity and full functionality of the corporate Private Branch Exchange
(PBX). The PBXgateway is referred as a “gateway ” because it is the central receiving
point for routing voice conversations from one or more locations to the PBX.
Teleworkers, usually working from an off-site location, can place a call through the
corporate PBX by simply dialing the number as if they were in the main office.
Single remote users can connect their digital phones through the EXTender™ 4000 for
IP.
Remote offices with multiple users can be connected through one of the following
devices:
•
EXTender™ 6000, 8 & 12-user: You can use 2 EXTender 6000 8-user devices,
or 2 EXTender 6000 12-user devices.
The single-user devices are commonly referred to as a “Remote unit” and the multi-user
devices are referred to as “Branch Office units”.
Compatible
Networks
The PBXgateway and Remote units are linked through a wide variety of network
devices (TA, CSU/DSU) and network types (ISDN, IP)
Features
The PBXgateway has the following features:
•
Support for a wide variety of network termination equipment
•
Support for 8 or 12 remote users (
•
Configuration via the internet (HTML Configuration)
•
ConneX calling support
•
Caller ID support
•
Fax support on the 2nd B channel (DEFINITY and Meridian protocols)
•
Setup Wizard for configuring the units
•
ISDN and IP Call Suspend modes
Compatible Remote Units
The PBXgateway is compatible with the EXTender 4000 and 6000, with each unit having different
network and user requirements. Complete installation and configuration information is provided with each
remote unit in the form of a “Quick Installation Guide” (QIG). Please consult the QIG for information not
contained in this document.
What is the EXTender™ 4000 for IP?
The EXTender 4000 provides remote voice access to a corporate PBX for a single remote user. Remote
users can connect to the PBXgateway via a 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection using IP packet
transmission. Remote users’ phones will connect into the remote module via an RJ-45 phone jack, and
their phone traffic will be placed in IP packets and sent out to the LAN via a 10/100BaseT Ethernet
connection to the PBXgateway.
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
8
Types of Network Connections
The PBXgateway is designed to connect over a wide variety of third party network devices using three
types of network connections:
•
Synchronous-Serial connection (V.35, RS-530, RS-232)
•
Asynchronous-Serial connection (RS-232)
•
IP (10/100BaseT Ethernet)
Voice Transmission
At both the branch office and corporate sites, all voice and signaling information is placed into digital data
packets, which are then sent out over the data network. This data is transmitted digitally over the
connection as a series of “ones” and “zeroes”. The data packets are encapsulated within a MCK
Proprietary protocol called Remote Voice Protocol™ (RVP)
The most important consideration for packetizing voice is defining when each character begins.
Synchronous vs. Asynchronous Transmission
One way to do this is by providing a clock signal. At a precise time, the transmission starts. This is called
Synchronous (see page 14). In Asynchronous transmission, there is no clocking signal. The receiving
terminal knows what’s what because each character begins with a start bit and ends with a stop bit (see
page 15).
(VoIP)
The voice and signaling packets are sent using Internet Protocol (IP) over the packet-switched data
networks as opposed to using the traditional circuit-switched protocols. Voice packets get delivered to the
alternate device using the RVP. This protocol handles the timing and delivery of the packets (See page
16 for more information).
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
9
Connections vs. Remotes
Types of Connections
Type
Remotes Supported
Maximum # of
Remotes per
Gateway
Model(s)
Protocols
RVP_Direct
2
6000
*RVP over HDLC
RVP_IP
2
6000
*RVP_over_IP
Ethernet (10 or 100 BaseT)
RVP_IP
1
4000
*RVP_over_IP
Ethernet (10 or 100 BaseT)
Table 1:
Connection Type
Serial WAN Ports
Connections vs. Remotes
* Remote Voice Protocol™ (RVP), MCK Proprietary protocol.
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
10
Compatible Telephones
Nortel (Meridian and Norstar)
Avaya
Meridian
M2006 *
M2008 *
M2216
M2250
M2317
M2616
M2616CT
M3110
M3901
M3902
M3903
M3904
M3905
6402+ *
6408+
6416D+
6424D+
8403
8410D
8411D
8410DR
8434DX
CallMaster III
CallMaster IV
CallMaster V
CallMaster VI
Gray Market
9031DCP
* This digital display telephone is NOT recommended
for administrative purposes.
Norstar
M7100 *
M7208**
M7310
M7324
M7410
ATA2
T7316
T7316E
T7208**
* This digital display telephone is NOT
recommended for administrative purposes.
** Recommended if a set must be extended via the
ConneX port.
Toshiba
Magix Digital Telephones
DKT2004
DKT2010
DKT2020
4424LD+
4424D+
4412D+
4406D+
4400D
DSS 4450 (add on module for 4424LD+ and
4424D+)
4400
Compatible Voice System:
Avaya™ MERLIN MAGIX®
Compatible Voice System:
Toshiba Strata DK
Alcatel
Ericsson
Reflexes 4023
Reflexes 4034
Reflexes 4035
Dialog 3200
Dialog 3201
Dialog 3202
Dialog 3203
Dialog 3210
Dialog 3211
Dialog 3212
Dialog 3213
DBY 409 – Add on Module Key for Dialog 3213
Compatible Voice System:
Alcatel 4400
Alcatel 4200
Compatible Voice System:
Ericsson MD 110
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
11
Compatible Telephones, continued
Panasonic DBS
44210
44220
44223
44224
44225
44230
44233
Iwatsu
IX-MKT
IX-12KTD-2
IX-24KTD-2
IX-12KTD-3
IX-24KTD-3
Compatible Voice System:
Iwatsu ADIX APS
Compatible Voice System:
Panasonic DBS 576
Panasonic DBS 576 HD
Table 2:
Compatible Phone Sets
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
12
Typical Installation
The PBXgateway can be installed with a variety of different configurations depending
on available bandwidth, the type of third-party termination equipment, and the type of
EXTender installed at the remote location.
Typical
Installation
LAN
LAN
Router
Router
PBXgateway
EXTender 6000
Public
DSU/CSU
DSU/CSU
Punch Block
Punch Block
Maximum of 12 users
Branch Office
PBX
Corporate Office
Figure 1:
Synchronous (RVP_Direct) Installation
LAN
LAN
PBXgateway
EXTender 6000
IP Network
Router
Router
Punch Block
Punch Block
PBX
Maximum of 12 users
Corporate Office
EXTender 4000
Branch Office
Telephone
Figure 2:
RVPoIP (RVP_IP) Installation
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
13
Synchronous-Serial Connection
Synchronous
-Serial
A connection type utilizing the RVP protocol, encapsulated over HDLC, to send voice
packets over the network (using traditional network devices: TA, CSU/DSU, FRAD)
using a synchronous-serial bit stream via the WAN port of the unit. A synchronous
connection relies on a master clock (an oscillator generated signal) to identify the
starting point of each digital bit (ons & offs or “ones” and “zeroes”) being sent. Voice
packets are spaced by time.
Connection Type:
RVP_Direct
Advantages:
•
Synchronous transmission of data requires fewer bits (and takes less time).
•
Uses common network circuits.
•
Circuit switched networks are generally more reliable for voice transmission.
Network Types:
•
Switched 56/64K
•
ISDN
Connection:
(2) DB-25 male connectors (WAN ports)
Interface Types:
•
RS-232
•
V.35
•
RS-530
Remote Office EXTender Models:
EXTender 6000 for Branch Offices
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
14
Asynchronous-Serial Connection
An Asynchronous-Serial Connection is a connection where voice packets are sent at irregular intervals.
Each voice packet is preceded with a Start Bit and followed by a Stop Bit. The timing of the transmission
is not determined by the timing of a previous character.
Figure 3:
Asynchronous Transmission Data Bits
Connection Type:
RVP_Direct
Advantages:
•
Used in lower speed transmission
•
Less expensive
Network Types:
•
Switched 56/64K
•
ISDN
Connection:
(2) DB25 male connectors (WAN ports)
Remote Extender Models:
EXTender 6000 for Branch Offices
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
15
Voice Over IP (RVP__Over_IP)
Voice over
IP
(VoIP)
A network connection allowing voice packets to be delivered to the alternate site
using the Internet Protocol (IP). In most IP circuits two types of devices are utilized.
A server (PBXgateway) is the main hub of information being requested, and a client
(the Remote unit) or user obtaining the information. The Remote unit receives the
voice packets from the user phone and transmits the packets via the LAN and
sends them over the WAN to the PBXgateway at the corporate facility.
Connection Type:
RVP_Over_IP
Advantages:
•
Avoids toll charges charged by ordinary telephone services.
•
IP connections are common and readily available.
•
Makes use of existing network infrastructure.
•
Avoids fixed costs associated with T1 & ISDN circuits.
Network Types:
•
Switched 56/64K
•
ISDN
Connection:
(1) RJ-45 10 or 100 BaseT connector
Extender Models:
•
EXTender 4000 for IP
•
EXTender 6000 for Branch Offices
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
16
Digital Telephone/PBX Features
Digital phones extended by the PBXgateway have the full functionality of phones located in the corporate
facility.
Features include:
•
the ability to place and receive calls
•
extension-to-extension dialing
•
speed dialing
•
caller ID
•
conference calls
•
transfer calls
•
full access to voicemail
•
the use of the auto-attendant
•
the utilization of ACD systems and call accounting software
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
17
Call Suspend
The Call Suspend feature allows the telecom manager to reduce dialup ISDN/IP costs by bringing down
the ISDN/IP connection when all phones are inactive for a configurable period of time. When the line is
disconnected the phones will display that they are in the Call Suspend mode. Whenever a user goes offhook or an incoming call occurs, the ISDN/IP connection is brought back up and all phones are taken out
of Call Suspend mode.
In addition, the Rlogin to remote and Copy file to remote features of the management interface also cause
the ISDN/IP connection to be brought up and down as a phone would.
The Call Suspend feature has been designed with the assumption that if the ISDN/IP connection is
brought down, it is possible to get busy signals from the ISDN/IP network preventing the extenders from
communicating, causing an interruption of phone service to the branch office. This assumption leads to
setting the Call Suspend timer to a value that will not allow the ISDN/IP connection to go down during
normal business hours.
Note: The Call Suspend feature is configured at the remote site. Refer to the EXTender 6000 Quick
Installation Guide (QIG) for more information.
Normal Behavior
The expected usage pattern for the ISDN connection will be that at the beginning of the business day, the
phones will be brought out of Call Suspend mode bringing up the IDSN connection when the first user
either goes off-hook or an incoming call arrives. The ISDN connection will remain up for the remainder of
the business day because all phones will not be idle longer than the Call Suspend timeout value. At the
end of the day, all phones will become inactive for the Call Suspend timeout value and the ISDN
connection will be brought down. If anyone is working late or comes in early, normal usage will bring
back up the ISDN connection.
Reconnection Failures
If the remote attempts to reconnect and fails, all the phones are brought back to “Suspended ….” State
and the connection will be retrieved at the next “Off-hook”.
Rebooting the Remote or the Gateway
When the remote and Gateway go into Call Suspend mode, they each keep track of the connection
information, e.g. phone number, call identifier, so that the units can be reconnected when Call Suspend
mode is exited. If any unit reboots while in Call Suspend mode, it will attempt to reconnect after starting.
Note: the TA’s can take a while to sync up with the Central office, so connection is not attempted
immediately.
Gateway
There is a problem when the gateway reboots because the remote unit has no way of knowing that the
gateway has lost synchronization. Until the two units re-synchronize, all incoming calls will be ignored. To
resolve this issue, the gateway unit will attempt to re-connect to the remote unit a configurable number of
times (assumes the network link and the remote unit are still functioning). If the connection cannot be
made, it is up to a user at the remote to cause the connection to be made.
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Changing voice parameters at the gateway which need to be sent to the remote, will cause the ISDN
connection to be reestablished. Changing Call Suspend parameters at the remote will take effect
immediately.
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
18
Call Suspend Modes
The Call Suspend feature is primarily designed for EXTender configurations using ISDN as the primary
WAN link, although it can also be used in IP configurations (see below). Call Suspend, in ISDN networks,
is intended to take the ISDN WAN connection down while the branch office is closed, in order to save on
ISDN usage charges.
When Call Suspend is activated, the EXTender 6000/PBXgateway will take down the ISDN WAN link
after an administrator defined amount of time (minimum 30 minutes) during which there is no phone
activity. When phone activity occurs, the ISDN link will automatically be brought back up, re-establishing
the connection between the PBXgateway and EXTender 6000 units. When using Call Suspend, one of
following two modes can be used.
Remote Only Wakeup - Disabled
This mode will become the default setting when Call Suspend is selected. In this mode, when the ISDN
BRI line is down with the units in Call Suspend, the line will be brought back up by activity at the Branch
location (a set going off-hook or a key being pressed), or by an incoming call.
Remote Only Wakeup - Enabled
In this mode, the ISDN line between the Branch and PBXgateway will only be brought back up by activity
at the Branch (a set going off-hook or a keypress). Incoming calls to the Branch will not bring the line up
– they will ring into voice mail. The intention of this feature is to prevent ISDN connection charges from
being incurred due to calls being made to a branch after hours, while still allowing employees at that
branch to use the phones outside of normal business hours.
When using Call Suspend in IP network environments, the EXTenders will not tear down the WAN link, as
this is controlled by the IP network. However, Call Suspend is useful in IP environments as it reduces
bandwidth usage by preventing unnecessary PBX signaling traffic from being sent across the WAN link
when the phones at the branch are not being used (minimum timeout of 30 minutes, as with ISDN
configurations).
Using ConneX
The ConneX application is supported on MCK’s ConneX™ PBXgateway™. This application puts PBX
features and dialtone in your hands when using a mobile phone. The ConneX application is especially
attractive to mobile workers because they can receive calls and access the corporate PBX system and
commonly used voice applications from anywhere. PBX applications that are accessible through your
mobile phone include: internal dialing, hold, transfer, conferencing and dialtone. ConneX provides
survivability as well, in cases where your digital desk set goes down, you are still able to receive calls on
your mobile phone.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
19
Call routed to cell phone
PSTN & Wireless
Incoming call
Any touch-tone phone
PBX
Mobile Worker
Corporate Office
Sample of Commands:
SD
Console
Telephone
WAN
PW R 1
S W I T C H UNIT
Off hook: press ***
Hold: press ##H
Transfer: ##T
Conference: Press ##C
2
Port Status
3
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
PBXgateway ™
ConneX PBXgateway
Figure 4:
ConneX
Example: Jane’s mobile phone rings. Jane is required to press any key on her mobile phone’s dial pad to
accept the call and to prevent the call from going into her corporate voicemail. After she accepts the call,
she is able to talk to the caller, place the call on hold, transfer the call or set up a conference call as if she
were using her office phone. (See the ConneX Commands starting on page 255 to learn which keys to
press to imitate digital handset push buttons). If Jane chooses not to accept the call, the call is forwarded
to her corporate phone voicemail.
When Jane wants to bypass long-distance toll charges, she dials into the ConneX PBXgateway using the
number provided by the System Administrator to get PBX dialtone. Once she has accessed the dialtone
she can place calls through the PBX system.
For information of configuring the ConneX application, as well as your ConneX phone please refer to
Using ConneX on page 250.
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
20
Fax Traffic (DEFINITY and Meridian)
You are able to send fax traffic over the 2nd B channel (B2) of each port on a remote or a PBXgateway
unit. The data is compressed using 32 Kbps ADPCM.
Each of the ports on an EXTender 6000 or PBXgateway will extend both of the PBX B channels, allowing
the use of the second B channel for analog applications such as fax. You can send faxes by simply
connecting the fax machine to the expansion card in the digital phone connected to the remote unit.
The analog port will have the label based upon the telephone type and protocol used:
Protocol
Telephone
Name of Analog Port
DEFINITY
6400 Series
8411D
2616
100A Analog Interface Module
Analog Adjunct
ATA (Analog Terminal Adapter)
Meridian
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
21
Voice Compression vs. Bandwidth
The PBXgateway provides a choice of voice compression algorithms to allow up to 12 phones to be
extended. The compression algorithm selected determines the bandwidth required.
DS0: The worldwide standard speed for digitized voice conversation at 64,000 bits per second.
ISDN: A digital transmission link consisting of two “B” channels (bearer) for voice and one “D” channel
(data). Each “B” channel transmits voice signals at 64,000 bits per second.
The following are user selectable voice compression methods supported by the PBXgateway to
accommodate the available bandwidth; G.729A (8 Kbps), ADPCM 24 (24 Kbps), ADPCM 32 (32 Kbps),
G.711 (64 Kbps)
Note: These numbers indicate the bandwidth required per phone, not including overhead (8k).
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
22
Physical Characteristics
The PBXgateway is an enclosed metal chassis, which can be stacked and installed in a standard 19”
telecommunications or data communication rack.
Additional physical characteristics:
Front of Unit (See Front of PBXgateway on page 29)
•
One DB-9 port used to connect a PC or terminal to the Management Interface
•
Four dual-color system status LEDs
•
Twelve or eight single-color port status LEDs
Back of Unit (Back of PBXgateway on page 29)
•
One 50-pin, RJ-21 connector used to connect to the PBX
•
Two DB-25 WAN ports to connect to the network device.
•
One RJ-45 Ethernet port for LAN connection for Voice over IP traffic and/or Telnet
management access.
•
Four Ethernet Status LEDs
•
Fan
•
Power Switch
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
23
Configuration and Management
Configuration The configuration, operational, and troubleshooting features of the PBXgateway and
and Manageme EXTender are accessible through the Management Interface (MI). The MI can be
accessed with a PC or terminal connected in one of three ways:
•
Direct Serial connection (see page 44).
•
TCP/IP-based Telnet access (see page 46).
•
Inband login between the Switch and Remote units. (see page 105)
The MI
The MI is a menu system compatible with VT-100 Enhanced Terminal Interface (ETI)
enabling the system administrator:
Phone Set
Interface
(Remote only)
•
the capability for full configuration of the phone and WAN ports plus IP
configuration.
•
the access for full management capabilities
•
the access to status information on port usage
•
the information necessary to troubleshoot problems
•
the ability to review and monitor log messages (for possible signs of error)
•
the ability to perform complete software upgrades.
The Phone-Set user interface allows limited access (to the MI) including: Console
port configuration for serial access and IP configuration for Telnet access.
The Phone-Set interface is accessible through any phone at the Remote site and
provides a few useful diagnostic commands, status displays, and a limited set of
configuration options-TCP/IP, console bit rate, and connection.
(Refer to Appendix C, Phone-Set Interface for more information)
Diagnostic Capabilities
The PBXgateway Management Interface (MI) provides the system administrator with numerous
diagnostic capabilities. In addition, each time the PBXgateway is powered-up, it performs a diagnostic
self-test.
Through the MI, you can:
•
View statistics of the unit
•
Reset the WAN and Telephony ports
•
Test the WAN ports
•
View results of the power-up self-test.
•
Set up SNMP traps for capturing and viewing statistics and error conditions.
References:
•
Refer to the chapter on Troubleshooting for more information.
•
Refer to Appendix D SNMP for more information on SNMP traps.
PBXgateway™ & EXTender™6000 System Administrator’s Guide
24
Chapter 1: Product Specifications
This Chapter provides information and specifications including; Regulatory approvals, system
architecture, memory, WAN design, interfaces, voice, and electrical specifications.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
25
Specifications
This section contains information on specific electrical and mechanical parameters. These specifications
are provided as a reference for design characteristics of the PBXgateway.
Note: Specifications for each Remote unit are contained within the individual Quick Installation Guide
(QIG). Specifications are subject to change without notice as technological or manufacturing changes
warrant.
Regulatory Approvals
FCC
CE
Industry Canada
Safety
47 CFR Part 68 US: 2DKOT01BEXT6001; 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B
EN55024+A1, A2; EN55022+A1, A2; EN6100-3-2; EN6100-3-3
CS-03; 3807B-EXT6001
UL60950-1; C22-2 Nº60950-1; EN60950-1; IEC60950-1
System Architecture
CPU
DSP
Motorola MPC 852T, 50MHz
5 Analog Devices 2185 75 MIPS per Device
Memory
DRAM
Flash Memory
16MB
8MB
WAN Ports
Protocol
Interface
Encapsulation
Synchronous-serial; Asynchronous-serial
RS-232, V.35, or RS-530
High-level Data Link Control (HDLC)
Interfaces
Ethernet
Serial/WAN
Management
PBX/KSU
Single 10 / 100 megabit, RJ-45
EIA/TIA-232, EIA/TIA-530, EIA/TIA-V35
Serial RS-232, DB9
Up to 8 digital line interfaces over a 25 pair RJ-21 cable
Voice
Voice compression
G.729a, G.711, G.726 (ADPCM 32 and ADPCM 24
Protocols and Services
LAN
WAN
RVP over Internet Protocol (IP)
Remote Voice Protocol (RVP™) (proprietary) over HDLC
Electrical
Line Voltage
Frequency
Max Power Consumption
Protection
100-240 VAC
50-60 Hz
60 W
Over Current/Voltage and short circuit protection
Environment
Temperature
Relative Humidity
32° - 130° F (0° - 55° C)
5 to 95%
Dimensions
17 in x 8 in 1 3/4 in (432 mm x 203 mm x 44 mm)
Weight
6 lbs 7 oz (3 kg)
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
26
Chapter 2: Installation
This Chapter provides the following information for installing both the Switch and Remote units:
•
Pre-installation requirements
•
How to install the hardware
•
How to wire the hardware
•
Complete power-up sequence
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
27
Safety
Checklist
!
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
•
Do not install this product near water, for example, in a wet basement
location.
•
Do not overload wall outlets, as this can result in the risk of fire or
electrical shock.
•
Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces.
•
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord.
•
Do not locate this product where someone walking on it will damage the
cord.
•
Do not operate the system if chemical gas leakage is suspected in the
area. Use telephones located in some other safe area to report the trouble.
•
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
•
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically
designed for wet locations.
•
Never touch non-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
28
Hardware Components
The figures below show the PBXgateway front panel display and rear panel connectors. Refer to the
table below for component descriptions.
Note: For details on the components of the Remote Units, refer to the specific Quick Installation
Guides (QIG) shipped with each device.
Connected Ports (solid green)
A
LNK
Console
Port Status
WAN
PWR 1
2
3 Reset
1 2
Figure 5:
B
C
100-240 V ~ 0.8A 50-60 HZ
D
E
3
4 5 6
7
CLN
8 9 10 11 12
Front of PBXgateway
F
TELEPHONY INTERFACE
G
WAN 1
LNK ACT
ANALOG
WAN 2
0
Figure 6:
Letter
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Table 3:
LANCLN
Back of PBXgateway
Label
Cable Type
Description
Console
DB-9
Connect to a PC COM port
Fan
Power
Power Switch
Telephony Interface
WAN1
WAN2
LAN
LAN
LNK
RJ-21
DB-25, serial.
straight-through
RJ-45 Ethernet
Note: Set the COM port as follows: Baud rate:
9600, Databits: 8, Parity: none, Stopbits: 1,
Software flow control: Xon/Xoff.
Cools unit.
Connect to a 120 VAC outlet
Turns unit on and off.
Wire to a punchdown block and then to the PBX.
Connects the Gateway to a synchronous or
asynchronous- serial device (CSU/DSU or other
network device).
Note: Use an RS-530 type cable or DB-25 to
M34 cable should for high-speed links to V.35
equipment.
Connects the Gateway to the LAN for use in
VOIP applications.
Component Description
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
29
Pre-Installation Requirements
MCK Supplied Equipment
PBXgateway
EXTender 6000
EXTender 4000
•
One eight or twelve user, rack mountable device
•
Two Mounting brackets and hardware
•
One power cord
•
One RS-530 Cable
•
One System Administrator’s Guide
•
One QIG (Quick Installation Guide)
•
One Remote unit
•
Two Mounting brackets and hardware
•
One power cord
•
One RS-530 Cable
•
One DB-9 Console Cable
•
One QIG (Quick Installation Guide)
•
One Remote unit
•
One Power Supply
•
One QIG (Quick Installation Guide)
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
30
Customer Supplied Equipment
Note: This includes information for installing the PBXgateway and EXTender 6000. For information on
“Customer Supplied Equipment” for each Remote unit, refer to the specific User’s Guide.
The customer must supply the following equipment:
•
Telephones and line cords Note: Use two-wire digital display phones only.
•
Two 50-pin RJ 21 female connectors for connecting the PBX to the PBXgateway and digital
phones to the EXTender 6000.
•
Punch blocks capable of cross connecting the PBXgateway to the PBX and digital phones to the
Remote locations.
•
A PC (or VT-100 compatible terminal) for configuration.
•
One 10 or 100 BaseT RJ-45 cable if connecting the units to the Ethernet network.
•
ISDN circuit at both Remote and Switch locations. Must be capable of connecting the remote
branch office to the Switch location.
•
A network-terminating device capable of interfacing with the PBXgateway and Remote units. Must
support synchronous serial protocol using RS-232, V.35, or RS-530 interface types, or a 10 or 100
BaseT Ethernet for an IP connection.
•
PBX digital ports programmed correctly for the telephone type being used at the remote location.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
31
Network Requirements
The PBXgateway and EXTender 6000 must be installed on an existing LAN or WAN network.
•
Each unit requires a network device that supports a synchronous-serial interface, asynchronous
serial or an Ethernet connection to a TCP/IP network.
•
The network must be operational and active to complete the installation of the PBXgateway.
•
The network device must support one of the following:
Synchronous serial signaling on its data port using an RS-232, V.35, or RS-530 interface.
Or
Asynchronous serial signaling on its data port using an RS-232.
Or
10/100BaseT Ethernet connection.
Power Requirements
The system has been designed to operate from 100-240 VAC, 50-60Hz. Power should not be applied to
the PBXgateway and EXTender 6000 until specified in the installation procedures.
Location Requirements
•
The maximum length of cable between the PBXgateway and the PBX is 500 ft (150 meters).
•
The maximum length of cable between the Remote unit and the digital phones is 500 ft (150
meters).
•
The PBXgateway and EXTender 6000 power supply and cabling should be installed away from
high power/high RF noise devices such as computers, fans, fluorescent ballast, power supplies,
etc.
•
Use good wiring practices. Do not run wires over fluorescent lights, computers, air conditioners,
etc. as this can introduce noise to the signals.
•
The PBXgateway and EXTender 6000 must be installed in a secure location. Unauthorized access
could lead to toll fraud.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
32
Installation
Connecting the PBX/KSU to the PBXgateway
Required
Components
•
One RJ-21 cable with a 50-pin female connector.
•
Up to twelve digital lines from the PBX.
•
Active network from the Branch Office to the corporate facility over ISDN or
10/100 IP connection.
•
Installed network device at each location.
•
Cross-connection telephony wiring blocks sufficient for the installation
•
Additional wiring sufficient for the digital lines.
Note: For detail wiring information, see the next page.
Procedure
1. Install (2) cross-connect wiring blocks.
2. Connect the digital lines from the PBX to one of the cross-connect blocks
via an RJ-21 cable.
3. Connect the PBXgateway telephony port to the other cross-connect block
using an RJ-21, 50-pin cable.
4. Cross-connect the PBXgateway digital ports to the PBX digital lines via (2)
cross-connection blocks.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT connect phones to a PBXgateway Unit.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
33
Connections to the PBX continued
RJ-21
(up to 12 Ports)
Punch Blocks
RJ-21
(up to 12 Ports)
PBXgateway
Cross-Connect
Wires
PBX
Figure 7:
Pin
26
1
28
3
30
5
32
7
Cable
Pair
WH/BL
BL/WH
WH/GN
GN/WH
WH/SL
SL/WH
RD/OR
OR/RD
Port
Pin
1
34
9
36
11
38
13
40
15
2
3
4
Cable
Pair
RD/BR
BR/RD
BK/BL
BL/BK
BK/GN
GN/BK
BK/SL
SL/BK
Connections to the PBX
Port
Pin
5
42
17
44
19
46
21
48
23
6
7
8
Cable
Pair
YL/OR
OR/YL
YL/BR
BR/YL
VI/BL
BL/VI
VI/GN
GN/VI
Port
9
10
11
12
Wire Color Abbreviations:
BK=Black, BR=Brown, RD=Red, OR=Orange, YL=Yellow, GN=Green, BL=Blue, VI=Violet, WH=White
SL=Slate
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
34
Mounting the PBXgateway and EXTender 6000
Introduction
The following procedure explains the steps necessary to secure the PBXgateway and
EXTender 6000 to a standard 19-inch communications rack.
Note: The Rack is not supplied with the unit.
Procedure
1. Attach the mounting brackets to the unit.
2. Position the unit so the mounting brackets are aligned with the mounting holes of
the chassis.
3. Secure the unit with mounting hardware (4 screws) provided.
Figure 8:
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
Mounting the Unit
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
35
Connections to the Network Device
Introduction
The PBXgateway and EXTender 6000 connects to a variety of network devices
through a Synchronous-serial connection, or 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection.
The physical connection is accomplished through two DB-25 connectors labeled
WAN1 and WAN2, or an RJ-45 Ethernet connector. The following protocols are
recommended:
Synchronous
Protocol
•
High level Data Link Control (HDLC)
•
A link layer protocol standard for point-to-point and multi-point
communications.
Connection Types
•
RS-232 (see page 37 for pinouts)
•
V.35 (see page 37 for pinouts)
•
RS-530 (see page 38 for pinouts)
Asynchronous
Protocol
•
V.120
•
Clear-async-bonding
Connection Types
•
RS-232 (see page 37 for pinouts)
Internet Protocol Protocol
• Internet Protocol (IP)
•
Standard network protocol.
Connection Type
•
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
36
Wiring Information
Figure 8 through 10, lists each pin within the DB-25 connector with the signal
description and signal/voltage source, using the Electronics Industry Association (EIA)
standard.
Wiring Info
RS-232 (DB-25) Serial Connector Pinouts
Signal/Voltage Source
Shield Designations
Shield Designations
Signal/Voltage Source
1 Shield
Common
2 (TD) Transmitted Data
DTE
3 (RD) Received Data
DCE
4 (RTS) Request to Send
DTE
DTE
Secondary Tx Data 14
DCE
Tx Clock 15
DCE
SecondaryReceived Data 16
DCE
Receiver Clock 17
5 (CTS) Clear to Send
DCE
DTE
Local Loopback 18
6 (DSR) DCE Ready
DCE
DTE
Request to Send (Return) 19
7 Signal Ground
Common
DTE
Data Terminal Ready 20
8 (DCD) Rcvd Line Signal Detect
DCE
9 (+) DC Test Voltage
Common
10 (-) DC Test Voltage
Common
RL-DE SQ-DCE
Remote Loopback 21
DCE
Ring Indicator 22
Data Signal Rate Selector 23
CH-DTE Cl-DCE
11 Unassigned
DTE
Tx Clock 24
DCE
Test Mode 25
Figure 9:
--
12 (SCF/Cl) Secondary Rcvd Line
DCE
13 Secondary Clear to Send
DCE
RS-232 Cable Pinouts
V.35 (DB-25) Serial Connector Pinouts
Signal/Voltage Source
Shield Designations
Shield Designations
Signal/Voltage Source
13
DCE
Test Mode 25
DTE
External Transmit Clock (a) 24
-
12 Transmit Clock (b)
DCE
11 External Transmit Clock (b)
DTE
-
23
10
-
22
9 Receive Clock (b)
DCE
8 Carrier Detect
DCE
DTE
Remote Loopback 21
DTE
Data Terminal Ready 20
-
19
DTE
Local Loopback 18
DCE
Receive Clock (a) 17
DCE
Receive Data (b) 16
DCE
Transmit Clock (a) 15
DTE
Transmit Data (b)14
-
7 Signal Ground
-
6 Data Sent Ready
DCE
5 Clear to Send
DCE
4 Request to Send
DTE
3 Receive Data (a)
DCE
2 Transmit Data (a)
DTE
1 Frame Ground
-
Figure 10: V.35 Cable Pinouts
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
37
RS-530 (DB-25) Serial Connector Pinouts
Signal/Voltage Source
Common
Shield Designations
Common
2 Transmitted Data
DTE
3 Received Data
DCE
4 Request to Send
DTE
Receiver Clock 17
5 Clear to Send
DCE
Local Loopback 18
6 DCE Ready
DCE
7 Signal Ground
Common
8 Carrier Detect
DCE
9 Receive Clock (Return)
Common
10 Carrier Detect (Return)
Common
11 DTE Tx Clock (Return)
Common
12 Tx Clock (Return)
Common
13 Clear to Send (Return)
Common
Tx Clock 15
Common
Received Data (Return) 16
DCE
DTE
Common
Signal/Voltage Source
1 Shield
Tx Data (Return) 14
DCE
Shield Designations
Request to Send (Return) 19
DTE
Data Terninal Ready 20
DTE
Remote Loopback 21
Common
Data Set Ready (Return) 22
Common
Data Terminal Ready (Return) 23
DTE
DTE Tx Clock (Return) 24
DCE
Test Mode 25
Figure 11: RS-530 Cable Pinouts
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
38
Compatible Remote Units
The PBXgateway is compatible with the following Remote units:
EXTender 6000 – for Branch Offices.
Provides connectivity for up to 12 remote users from a single branch office location. Each
phone is cross-wired to a port on the unit.
EXTender 4000 – for IP
Provides connectivity for a single user client via an IP network. The single user phone is simply
plugged into the Remote unit “phone” port.
Connecting the Remote Unit to the User phones
Required
Components
•
One RJ-21 cable with 50-pin female connector.
•
Active network from the Branch Office to the corporate facility over
an ISDN or IP.
•
Installed network device.
•
Digital phone(s) and line cord(s)
•
Cross-connection wiring block or break-out box sufficient for the
installation
•
Additional RJ-11 or RJ-45 phone cords.
Note: For detailed wiring information please refer to page 39.
Procedure
1.
Install (2) cross-connect wiring block or use a single breakout box.
2.
Connect the Remote phones to a punch block or breakout box.
3.
Wire breakout box or punch block to 50-pin cable RJ-21 connector.
4.
Connect the 50-pin, RJ-21 cable to telephony interface at the
Remote unit.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT connect the Remote Unit to a PBX/KSU.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
39
Connecting the EXTender 6000 Remote Unit to the Remote Phones
Punch Blocks
RJ-21
(up to 12 Ports)
Out to Remote
Desktops
EXTender 6000
Cross-Connect
Wires
Figure 12: Connections to the EXTender 6000
Pin
26
1
28
3
30
5
32
7
Table 4:
Cable
Pair
WH/BL
BL/WH
WH/GN
GN/WH
WH/SL
SL/WH
RD/OR
OR/RD
Port
Pin
1
34
9
36
11
38
13
40
15
2
3
4
Cable
Pair
RD/BR
BR/RD
BK/BL
BL/BK
BK/GN
GN/BK
BK/SL
SL/BK
Port
Pin
5
42
17
44
19
46
21
48
23
6
7
8
Cable
Pair
YL/OR
OR/YL
YL/BR
BR/YL
VI/BL
BL/VI
VI/GN
GN/VI
Port
9
10
11
12
Assignments (25-Pair Cable)
Wire Color Abbreviations:
BK=Black, BR=Brown, RD=Red, OR=Orange, YL=Yellow, GN=Green, BL=Blue, VI=Violet, WH=White
SL=Slate
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
40
Before you Power-Up the PBXgateway and EXTender 6000
Introduction
This procedure will detail the necessary steps to perform BEFORE bringing the
units online.
Checklist
The units are secured to a rack or placed on a shelf within the rack.
The appropriate 50-pin female, RJ-21 connectors are connected to the
Telephony Interface and wired to the PBX (PBXgateway) and remote user
phones (Remote unit).
At least one WAN port is connected to the appropriate network-terminating
device.
or
The LAN port is connected to your network using a standard RJ-45 Ethernet
cable.
Power Up
If the above checklist is OK, plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
Power-Up
Sequence
The WAN (PWR, 1, 2) and the Port Status LEDs (1-8 or 1-12) will begin to
flash. The unit automatically runs through a series of self-tests. After the tests
are complete, all active WAN port LEDS and connected phone ports should be
lit solid “Green”.
Note: If the LEDs do not light as described above, see the Troubleshooting
chapter.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
41
Chapter 3: Configuration
This Chapter provides information for configuring the PBXgateway and the Remote units through the
Management Interface (MI).
Attention System Administrator: All configuration parameters for the Remote units can be accessed from the
PBXgateway unit via the “Remote Login” menu selection within the MI. Units must be in an up-active-working
status.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
42
Connecting to the PBXgateway
Interface
Methods
The PBXgateway has a terminal based user interface for access to the MI for
configuration purposes.
Console User Interface:
VT-100 Enhanced Terminal Interface (ETI) accessed from a PC via one of
three possible methods:
Security
•
Direct Serial connection through the console port located on the front of
the PBXgateway. (refer to page 44)
•
LAN-based Telnet access (see page 46)
•
In-band management connection between the Switch and Remote (see
page 105)
It is recommended that an administrator password be assigned to prevent
unauthorized access to the Remote and PBXgateway. The PBXgateway has
two separate levels of password security:
Connect Password: Set by the system administrator, provides a secure WAN
link between the Gateway and Remote units. (see page 67 for more
information).
Your password should be alphanumeric only. In other words, only use
numbers or letters that are on the telephone keypad. DO not use symbols such
as $, & or *, as these cannot be entered on a digital deskset keypad.
Admin Password: Set by the system administrator and provides security to
restrict access to the MI. (See page 86 for more information).
System
Administrator
Note: Connect Passwords for Remotes and Gateway must match.
A system administrator is defined as the sole person responsible for the
maintenance and administration of the PBXgateway at the corporate facility.
What a System Administrator Must Know
•
The type of network connectivity used at the Corporate and Branch location. (ie: Serial
or IP).The type of network through which the PBXgateway communicates with the
branch location. (ie: ISDN or IP)
Note: The type of connectivity used at the Branch location, should match the Corporate
location.
•
The types of units installed at the remote location, (ie: EXTender 6000, IP EXTender
4000).
•
Information on which phones communicate with which PBXgateway ports.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
43
Connecting to the Management Interface (MI)
Direct Serial Connection
Introduction
The console port provides a direct serial connection for the PBXgateway and
EXTender 6000 allowing access to all features and functions of the MI and
the ability to configure, monitor and troubleshoot the unit.
Required Cable
A standard RS-232 serial straight-through (DB-9, Male) cable is required.
Use this cable to connect the PC’s COM Port to the console port on the front
of the unit.
Note: Cable length should not exceed 50 ft.
Before you conne Before connecting to the PBXgateway you must confirm that the PC’s COM
port settings match the console port settings as follows:
Baud rate: 9600
Databits: 8
Parity:
none
Stopbits: 1
Flow Control: XON/XOFF
Note: See Setting the Console Baud on page 83 for more information on
setting the PBXgateway baud rate.
DB9 Console
Connection
LNK
Console
Port Status
WAN
PWR 1
2
3 Reset
1 2
3
4 5 6
7
8 9 10 11 12
CLN
Figure 13: Console Port Connection
Procedure
1. Once the PC is connected to the unit through the console port, open an Enhanced Terminal
Interface (ETI) program on the PC.
Example: Windows Hyperterminal
Note: The MI configuration menus can be accessed through any generic Windows 95, or Windows
98, VT-100 Enhanced Terminal Interface (ETI) program.
2. Within the ETI program, change the data settings to match those shown on the previous page.
3. Save the changes within the ETI and restart the program for the changes to take effect.
4. Power up the Gateway or Extender 6000.
The unit performs a series of boot-up tests and upon finishing the boot-up process, displays the
following message:
Press “Enter” to start the Gateway shell…………….
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
44
IMPORTANT: If the unit is already powered-up the screen may display garbage characters. Press
F4 to refresh the screen.
5. Press Enter.
6. The MI Welcome Screen appears (refer to page 47).
Internet Access
You can also configure the PBXgateway and the EXTender units via a web browser interface (Internet
Explorer 5.X or higher). The HTML configuration editor menus will follow the same tree structure as the
current Management Interface (MI).
Login Procedures
1. Start your browser.
2. Point your browser to the IP address of the unit you wish to configure.
3. Follow the directions on the screen.
EXTender Window
A new browser window, titled EXTender appears. At the top of this window is a graphical
representation of the Gateway or EXTender unit, complete with WAN and Port Status LEDs. This
display updates automatically to ensure that the LEDs indicate the current status of the unit.
At the top right of the EXTender window is a link named LED Definitions. Click this link to see the
definition of each type of WAN and LAN LED.
The left side of the EXTender window is for navigation. From here, you can configure any part of the
EXTender by first locating the appropriate sub-menu. A plus sign (+) before a menu item indicates that
additional menu items are beneath it. Click on this menu item to show the items underneath.
The left side of the EXTender window has the main menu items listed below:
+Configuration
+Status
+Utilities
Gateway Login
Logout
The Support and Help options lead you to the MCK website, www.MCK.com.
Click on a menu item that is preceded by a minus (-) sign to hide the menu items that are beneath it.
The right side of the EXTender window displays the configuration information. When an item on the left
side of the window has items beneath it, you have the option of accessing the sub-items from the right
side of the window as well.
Printing
Use standard procedures to print pages in the EXTender window from your browser.
Note: In order to print pages from Internet Explorer versions 5 and above, you need to enable “Print
background color and images”.
To enable this setting:
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
45
1.
2.
3.
4.
Go to the browser window.
In the pulldown menu, select Tools->Internet Options.
Click on the Advanced tab. If necessary, scroll down to Printing.
Be sure that ‘Print background color and images” is checked.
Telnet Connection
Introduction
The PBXgateway and EXTender can be configured using a Telnet session over
the existing LAN connection. There is a maximum of four Telnet connections
per unit at one time.
IMPORTANT: All IP parameters must be configured before a Telnet session
can be established to a unit. (see page 76 for more information).
Procedure
1. On a computer running Windows, open the Telnet application by selecting Start/Run from the
desktop.
2. Enter telnet command along with the IP address assigned to the unit (see Figure below).
Figure 14: Telnet address
3. Click OK. The MI Welcome Screen appears (see next page).
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
46
Welcome Screen
Once the system administrator has connected to the MI the following Welcome Screen appears.
Figure 15: Welcome Screen
IMPORTANT TERMINAL SETTINGS
The MI requires a screen size of 24 lines X 80 columns. Make sure the Welcome Screen is bordered on
all four sides with a # symbol
To enlarge the screen (within the VT-100 application):
1. Click any corner of the screen.
2. Drag the screen to enlarge.
3. Check that the screen is bordered by “#” symbols.
4. Press Enter to access the Main Menu.
Note: See page 49 for detailed information on a typical menu or press F1 for the MI Help Screen (see
next page).
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
47
Help Screen
The MI has a built-in Help Screen that provides basic information for navigating through the interface.
Figure 16: Help Screen
The following information is provided:
Terminal Settings - These settings are necessary for properly displaying the configuration screens.
Menu Navigation – Explains the necessary command keys used for navigating through the MI. (see
page 51 for more information).
Special Keys – Explains the function keys used for special commands.
Press Enter to access the Main Menu.
Note: See the next page for detailed information on a typical menu.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
48
Typical Menu
Unit
Identifier
Menu
List
Menu
Path
Data Entry
Window
Unit Name and
Software revision
System Status
Window
“Live” Log
Port Status
Information
Figure 17: Typical Menu
Note: See the next page for information on the Menu Components.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
49
Menu Components
Area
Description
Unit Identifier
Displays either “Remote” or “Gateway” depending on which unit you are
connected to.
List of sub-menus used to configure the PBXgateway Switch and Remote
units. An * indicates the active menu selection.
Menu List
Menu Path
Displays the menu hierarchy.
Data Entry
Window
This is the only area on the main menu where information can be
changed. It is also where submenus are selected.
Unit Name and
Software
Revision
Information
Window
Displays the name assigned to the unit, and the software revision of the
firmware.
Port Status
Provides status information on all phone ports.
“Live” Log
This window provides the system administrator with log messages on the
status of the unit and error conditions. Last four messages are displayed.
This is not the entire log file. The entire log file can be viewed using the
following path:
(Path: Status->Display Log)
Each menu contains specific parameters. This window provides a context
sensitive help message which provides a brief description of the selected
item
Note: This log is not “live” via Remote Login menu item. Use F4 (Ctrl R) to
refresh the screen.
System Status
Table 5:
Provides status info for power, and both WAN ports
Menu Components
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
50
Command Keys
Introduction
The Management Interface (MI) utilizes a minimal set of command keys
to navigate through the different sub menus.
The following keys are used:
Key
Description
Cancel
Accepts the change or menu, or exits the current menu.
Selects the current item in a menu.
or
Changes the current item in a menu.
or
Note: Selecting an item can also be accomplished by typing in
the first character.
Help screen.
or
A
Refreshes the current screen.
or
Table 6:
R
Command Keys
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
51
PBXgateway Menu Items and Structure
The figure below outlines the menu structure for the PBXgateway, using the MI.
Configuration
Port
Enable [Yes/No]
Password [.........]
Voice
CH2 Usage [Voice,
ConneX_Link]
CH2 Voice
Default
Parameters in
BOLD are
default settings
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 1-8
Port 9-12
Enable [<default>/Yes/No]
Description [.......................]
User ID
[.......................]
Password [.......................]
Voice
CH2 Usage [Voice, ConneX_Link]
CH2 Voice
Enabled [ Yes/No]
Mode [ Sync-V.35/Sync-RS-232/Sync-RS-530/Async-RS-232-Dial]
WAN 1
WAN 2
WAN
Method [ ADPCM32/24/G.729A/G.711]
Path [ Dynamic/Constant]
DTMF [Out-of-Band/In Band] Norstar Only
Attenuation [25]
Silence Detection [Enabled, Disabled]
Jitter Delay [ 50]
Packet Size [ 2]
Packet Trace [ Enabled/Disabled]
Sync Setup
Async Setup
Sync Rate [38400]
DCE Type [ Adtran_2X64/Adtran_128/Adtran_Express_3000/
Adtran_Express_NTU /Motorola BS Pro/Motorola BS Pro EZ/Motorola Euro
BS Pro/<Manual_Setup_1> /<Manual_Setup_2>
Async Rate [ 115200/38400/57600]
ISDN Switch Type [ National_ISDN/AT&T_5ESS/Nortel_DMS-100]
Phone Number ...
Local Dialing Num1 [
ISDN SPID 1 [
Local Dialing Num2 [
ISDN SPID 2 [
Dial Prefix [
RVP Direct
RVP Over IP
Connect
]
]
]
]
]
Number Remotes [1]
Call Suspend
Num Dials on
Reboot [3]
DiffServ Class [ 0 ]
Call Suspend
RVP ConneX
Port Matching [ Enabled/Disabled]
Size [ 32768]
Default Priority [ Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
SYS Priority [ <default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
MGMNT Priority [ <default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/
Warning]
NET Priority [ <default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
PORT Priority [ <default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
Log
IP
LAN
AUX LAN
Address
Telnet [ Enabled/Disabled]
Rlogin [ Enabled/Disabled]
FTP [ Enabled/Disabled]
Enable [<Default>, Yes, No]
Dialback Mode [Fixed/Roaming/Disabled/Fixed/Forced ]
ConneX Ch Type [PBX_B2_Static}
Dialback Number [.....]
Idle Timeout [.....]
Min Password Length [.....]
Ring Count [.....]
ADSI Detection [<Default>, Enabled, Disabled]
ADSI CLID [<Default>, Enabled, Disabled]
Transfer Key (Meridian Only) [...]
Conference Key (Meridian Only) [...]
ConneX Line Key [...]
ConneX Link Key [...] (Norstar Only)
RCX Phone Lamp [Enabled, Disabled]
VMWI Email [Enabled, Disabled]
Call Log Email [Enabled, Disabled]
Email Address [.....]
Address [
Subnet Mask [
Default Router [
Enabled [ No/Yes]
Trap Hosts
Trap Priority [ Error/Warning/Intro/
Fatal]
Community [ ]
sysContact [ ]
sysLocation [ ]
Web Server
Enabled [No/Yes]
Trap Path [ Both/LAN/WAN]
Route 1-10
Address [
]
Subnet Mask [
]
Enabled [ No/Yes]
Gateway [ ]
Server IP Address [ ]
SMTP Server
Domain Name [ ]
SMTP Mailbox
SMTP User
SMTP Password
SNMP
Static Routes
DNS
SMTP
Syslog
Web Timeout
]
]
]
Trap Host 1 [
Trap Host 2 [
Trap Host 3 [
Trap Host 4 [
Trap Host 5 [
Trap Host 6 [
Trap Host 7 [
Trap Host 8 [
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Enabled [ No/Yes]
Host [ ]
ID [ Local0/ Local1 - Local7]
Default Priority [Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
SYS Priority [<default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
MGMNT Priority [<default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
NET Priority [<default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
PORT Priority [<default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
[30 minutes/1 hour/2 hours/3 hours/Never
Web Refresh LED
[Enabled/Disabled]
Name [ ]
Console baud [ 9600/19200/38400/2400/4800]
Modem baud [ 9600/19200/38400/2400/4800]
Modem Init String [ATE0]
System
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
52
Remote Unit Menu Items and Structure
This section of the manual provides a list of parameters for configuring each Remote. All
configuration parameters necessary for the installation and configuration for the Remote unit are
contained within this guide.
Configuration
Port
Default
Enable [Yes/No]
Auto Connect [Enabled, Disabled]
Password [.........]
Banner [.........]
More
Line Signaling [...] Norstar Only
Phone Features... Norstar Only
Parameters in
BOLD are
default settings
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 1-8
Port 9-12
Enabled [<default>Enabled, Disabled]
Ring [<default>Enabled, Disabled]
Active Call Monitoring [Enabled, Disabled]
Enable [<default>/Yes/No]
Description [.......................]
Auto Connect [<default>Enabled, Disabled]
ATA [Yes, No] Meridian Only
User ID
[.......................]
Password [.......................]
Banner [.......................]
Line Signaling [..] Norstar Only
Phone Features ...Norstar Only
Logout [.......................] Avaya Only
MSB Key [...] Meridian Only
More....
Key Mapping
911 Analog Port
Need Echo Cancellor [No, Yes]
Enabled [ Yes/No]
Mode [ Sync-V.35/Sync-RS-232/Sync-RS-530/Async-RS-232-Dial]
WAN 1
WAN 2
WAN
Key Mapping
911 Analog Port
Sync Setup
Sync Rate [38400]
DCE Type [ Adtran_2X64/Adtran_128/Adtran_Express_3000/
Adtran_Express_NTU /Motorola BS Pro/Motorola BS Pro EZ/Motorola Euro
BS Pro/<Manual_Setup_1> /<Manual_Setup_2>
Async Setup
Async Rate [ 115200/38400/57600]
ISDN Switch Type [ National_ISDN/AT&T_5ESS/Nortel_DMS-100]
Phone Number ...
Local Dialing Num1 [
ISDN SPID 1 [
Local Dialing Num2 [
ISDN SPID 2 [
Dial Prefix [
Dialback Num1[
Dialback Num2 [
Type [RVP_Direct/RVP_Over_IP}
RVP Direct
Connect
RVP Over IP
Primary Interface [WAN1/WAN2]
Primary Dial Nums ...
Secondary Interface [None/WAN1/WAN2]
Secondary Dial Nums ...
Utilization [100]
Call Suspend
Default Port
IP Destination
Ports 1-8
Call Suspend
Ports 9-16
EXT Voice Bandwidth [1000000]
Utilization [100]
Enable [Yes/No]
TImeout [30]
Remote Only Wakeup [Yes/No]
Mode Avaya/Meridian Only
Indicators Avaya/Meridian Only
ACD Tone Avaya/Meridian Only
Remote Login Timeout [30]
Remote Number [ ]
Gateway Port Offset [ ]
Size [ 32768]
Default Priority [ Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
SYS Priority [ <default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
MGMNT Priority [ <default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/
Warning]
NET Priority [ <default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
PORT Priority [ <default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
Log
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Primary Dial Num 1 [
Primary Dial Num 2 [
]
]
Secondary Dial Num 1 [ ]
Secondary Dial Num 2 [ ]
<Default>/Lamp/Ring
Ports [Enter list of
monitored indicators
<Default>/Lamp/Ring
IP
Address
Address [
Subnet Mask [
Default Router [
Telnet [ Enabled/Disabled]
Rlogin [ Enabled/Disabled]
FTP [ Enabled/Disabled]
DNS
SNMP
Web Server
]
]
]
Enabled [ No/Yes]
Server IP Address [ ]
Domain Name [ ]
Enabled [ No/Yes]
Server IP Address [ ]
Domain Name [ ]
More
Syslog
Static Routes
Enabled [ No/Yes]
Host [ ]
ID [ Local0/ Local1 - Local7]
Default Priority [Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
SYS Priority [<default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
MGMNT Priority [<default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
NET Priority [<default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
PORT Priority [<default>/Info/Debug/Trace/Fatal/Error/Warning]
Routes 1-10
Address [
Subnet Mask [
Gateway [ ]
Enabled [ No/Yes]
Trap Hosts
Trap Priority [ Error/Warning/Intro/
Fatal]
Community [ ]
sysContact [ ]
sysLocation [ ]
Trap Path [ Both/LAN/WAN]
Trap Host 1 [
Trap Host 2 [
Trap Host 3 [
Trap Host 4 [
Trap Host 5 [
Trap Host 6 [
Trap Host 7 [
Trap Host 8 [
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Name [ ]
Use Gateway Time [Yes/No]
Gateway Time Offset [0]
Console baud [ 9600/19200/38400/2400/4800]
Modem Init String [ATE0]
System
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
53
Remote Unit Menu Structure
Network Environments
Types of Networks
Introduction
This section of the manual provides the necessary information to configure
the PBXgateway and EXTender 6000 using the Management Interface (MI).
The units are programmed at the factory with “default” settings providing
basic parameters to accommodate most network environments.
Which type of Before beginning the configuration process, it is necessary to identify which
Network Device type of network device is connected to the PBXgateway and EXTender
do you have? 6000. Once you know the type of connection the table, below, will direct you
to the appropriate checklist that should be used for configuration.
To configure the PBXgateway with
See page
a Synchronous-Serial device (RVP_Direct)
55
a Asynchronous-Serial device (RVP_Direct)
57
an IP device (RVP_IP)
59
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
54
Synchronous-Serial Device Configuration (RVP_Direct)
This section of the manual provides the necessary information to configure the PBXgateway and
EXTender 6000 for connection to a synchronous-serial device. The units are programmed at the factory
with “default” settings providing basic parameters to accommodate many network environments.
Prerequisites for Configuration
Both units must be installed properly (see Chapter 2) and the network link between both devices must
be operational.
Basic Configuration – EXTender and PBXgateway
You must ….……
Set the voice compression
algorithm for all active phone
ports.
to…………
Provide adequate bandwidth for
all users.
Follow these steps…….
Refer to page 63
Refer to Appendix B,
Bandwidth Requirements.
Adjust the Jitter setting.
(PBXgateway Only)
Adjust the Attenuation.
(PBXgateway Only)
Enable/Disable WAN ports
Match network characteristics.
Refer to page 63
Decrease echo.
Refer to page 63
Enable WAN ports to connect
to network device.
Refer to page 70
Set the Sync Rate of the
WAN port
Match the data rate (sync rate)
of the network device.
Refer to page 71
Set the mode (interface type)
of the WAN
Match the interface type of the
network device.
Refer to page 71
Configure the Remote unit.
Set the required parameters.
Refer to page 106
Table 7:
Basic Configuration Steps
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
55
Synchronous-Serial Device Configuration continued
Optional Configuration - EXTender and PBXgateway
This section of the manual provides information for setting up optional parameters providing
customization, identification and security for the Gateway and Remote units.
To …………
for…………
Enable/Disable
individual phone ports
Set up a Connect
Password
Set IP Information
Managing and isolating the ports for troubleshooting
purposes.
Providing a secure WAN connection restricting
access to the PBXgateway from the Remote unit.
Telnet/FTP access to both the Gateway and
Remote units.
Refer to
page……
66
67
76
Note: The network administrator must allocate an IP
address for each unit.
Provide a System
Name
Set the Date/Time
Identification purposes. (not an IP Host name)
82
Accurate time and date stamps for troubleshooting
and for system maintenance.
85
Set an Admin
Password
Restricting access to the MI.
86
Set User ID
Set SNMP parameters.
Table 8:
Map remote users with specific PBX ports.
Configuring necessary information to utilize the
Simple Network Management Protocol functions of
the MI.
Optional Administrative Items
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
68
Appendix D
56
Asynchronous-Serial Device Configuration (RVP_Direct)
This section of the manual provides the necessary information to configure the PBXgateway™ for
connection to an asynchronous-serial device. The units are programmed at the factory with “default”
settings providing basic parameters to accommodate many network environments.
Prerequisites for Configuration
The PBXgateway (at the corporate site) and the EXTender 6000 (at the branch office) must be installed
properly and the network link between both devices must be operational.
Basic Configuration - EXTender and PBXgateway
You must ….……
to…………
Enable the WAN port and set
the mode (interface type).
Set the Async parameters for
the selected WAN port.
Set the “Jitter” and
“Compression” settings.
Match the interface type of
the network device.
Match the settings for the
device being used.
Match the available
bandwidth and quality.
Default Setting Refer to
page..
V.35
70
-
73
Jitter: 5
63
Compression
: ADPCM32
Table 9:
Configuration Steps
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
57
Asynchronous-Serial Device Configuration continued
Optional Configuration - EXTender and PBXgateway
This section of the manual provides information for setting up optional parameters providing
customization, identification and security.
To …………
Enable/Disable
individual phone ports
Set up a Connect
Password
for…………
Managing and isolating the ports for
troubleshooting purposes.
Providing a secure WAN connection
restricting access to the PBXgateway from the
Remote unit.
Refer to……
page 66
Set IP Information
Telnet/FTP access to both the PBXgateway
and Remote units.
page 76
Note: The network administrator must allocate
an IP address for each unit.
Identification purposes. (not an IP Host name)
Provide a System
Name
Set the Date/Time
Accurate time and date stamps for
troubleshooting and for system maintenance.
Restricting access to the MI.
Set an Admin
Password
Set User ID
Set SNMP parameters.
Table 10:
Map remote users with specific PBX ports.
Configuring necessary information to utilize
the Simple Network Management Protocol
functions of the MI.
Optional Administrative Items
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
page 67
page 82
page 85
page 86
page 68
Appendix D
58
IP Network Configuration (RVP_Over_IP)
MCK’s IP-based products utilize Voice over IP (VoIP) technology to deliver remote voice solutions. The
voice quality of these solutions is dependent on variables such as available bandwidth, network latency
and quality of service (QoS) initiatives, all of which are controlled by the network and internet service
providers. Because these variables are not in MCK’s control, it cannot guarantee the performance of the
user's IP-based remote voice solution.
This section of the manual provides the necessary information to configure the PBXgateway for
connection within an IP network.
Note: The units are programmed at the factory with RVP_Direct “default” settings. The “connect”
parameter (see page 106) must set to RVP_Over_IP.
Prerequisites for Configuration
Both units must be installed properly (see Chapter 3) and the network link between both devices must be
operational. The network administrator must allocate an IP address for each unit.
Basic Configuration - EXTender and PBXgateway
You must ….……
to…………
Set IP parameters.
Allow the PBXgateway to communicate
over the IP network.
Set up voice parameters
for all active phone ports,
and tune Jitter delay and
packet size.
(Gateway Only)
Enable each port to select compression
method and tune voice parameters to
accommodate IP network.
Refer to page 63
Disable both WAN ports.
Disable ports that are unnecessary for
RVP_IP.
Set the required IP and Connect
parameters.
Refer to page 70
Configure the Remote
unit.
Table 11:
Follow these
steps…….
Refer to page 76
Refer to page 106
Basic Configuration Steps
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
59
TCP/UDP Requirements
Ensure that the correct TCP/UDP ports have been opened to allow the EXTender 6000 to connect to the
PBXgateway through your company firewall. The following TCP/UDP port requirements must be met:
The EXTender 6000 and 4000 use even numbered ports 12,288 to 12,544. The port numbers start at
12,288 and increment by 2 to the total number of ports used. For example, if you have an 8 port
EXTender 6000 with 3 phones connected, then you would need to make sure ports 12,288, 12,290, and
12,292 are opened.
The Gateway unit uses TCP/UDP port 2698.
Optional Configuration - EXTender and PBXgateway
This section of the manual provides information for setting up optional parameters providing
customization, identification and security for the PBXgateway.
To …………
for…………
Enable/Disable
individual phone ports
Managing and isolating the ports individually.
Set up a Connect
Password
Provide a System
Name
Set the Date/Time
Providing a secure connection to restrict access to
the PBXgateway.
Identification purposes. (not an IP Host name)
67
Providing accurate time and date stamps for
troubleshooting and for system maintenance.
85
Set an Admin
Password
Restricting access to the MI.
86
Set User ID
Set SNMP parameters.
Table 12:
Map remote users with specific PBX ports.
Utilizing the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) functions of the MI.
Optional Administrative Items
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
Refer to
page……
66
82
68
Appendix D
60
Setting PBXgateway and EXTender Parameters
IMPORTANT: Changes made in this section, via the MI, are saved to the “Active” config file
stored on the Gateway and EXTender unit. All configuration files are saved with a .rem extension
for Remote unit files, and a .swt extension for PBXgateway files. The MI will prompt you to save
changes as necessary. There are options for saving these parameters under a different file name,
or creating and editing a “non-active” configuration file. (see page 175, for more information)
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Initial MI Connection
The initial set up of the PBXgateway MUST be done through a direct serial connection (see page
44), until the IP parameters have been entered (see page 76) allowing configuration via Telnet
through the Ethernet port.
Default Settings
The units are programmed at the factory with “default” settings providing basic parameters to
accommodate many network environments. It may be necessary to change these settings
depending on the network.
Set up Wizard
This is a setup program accessed through a direct-serial connection. The wizard prompts you to
enter required information necessary for configuring the PBXgateway. (see page 104, for more
information)
Multiple Remotes (RVP_Over_IP only)
The PBXgateway can interface with multiple clients from one to twelve users. It is necessary to
know the type of Remote units that are communicating with the PBXgateway for proper
configuration.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
61
Port Setup
<Default> vs. Individual Port Settings
Introduction
The PBXgateway provides voice connectivity for up to twelve remote users. All
phone ports on the PBXgateway are cross-wired to a digital port on the PBX.
This provides the remote user with full PBX functionality as if they were placing
calls from the corporate office. The Branch Office EXTender unit is connected
to the remote phones through an RJ-21 connector wired to a punch down
block or wall field.
Once the units are connected (see Chapter 2: Installation) the Management
Interface (MI) has two methods for setting up the PBXgateway ports:
<Default>
settings vs.
individual
settings
The <Default> settings: Sets all eight or twelve ports identically. With
<Default> selected for a specific parameter for any port, that parameter will be
set to whatever value the Port-><Default> parameter is set to. When
configuring ConneX user’s DO NOT use the default settings. Configure single
ports for each ConneX user.
Example: If the Port-><Default> value for “Voice method” is set to ADPCM
32, and Port 1 has <Default> selected for “Voice Method” then Port 1 will
utilize ADPCM 32 for its voice compression.
Individual port settings: Sets each port individually. This method is used for
customizing ports by providing the flexibility of changing parameters for
specific users. Use this method when configuring ports for ConneX users.
Note, however that some items, such as Voice Settings, are applicable to only
the Gateway.
Example: If Port 1 has the “Voice method” set to G.729A, rather than the
<Default>, Port 1 will utilize G.729A for its voice compression.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
62
Setting Voice Parameters (Gateway Only)
Introduction
The MI provides a menu for setting voice parameters for each phone port for
the PBXgateway. The following parameters are covered:
Method (of compression)-Selectable voice compression methods reduce
network bandwidth requirements. (refer to Appendix B for more information on
Bandwidth Settings)
Path – This will set the voice path to Dynamic or Constant. Dynamic means
that the Branch Office unit uses the available bandwidth when the remote user
goes off-hook. Constant means that the voice path is always reserved.
DTMF (Avaya Only) – The method of sending tones, which correspond to
numbers, pressed on the telephone, across the network. The tones can be
sent as voice (In-band), or as signals (Out-of-band).
Attenuation– Attenuation decreases the signal being sent to the PBX. This
can be adjusted to decrease the amount of echo during calls.
Silence Detection - When enabled, the Extender detects silent periods during
a conversation, and as a result sends no data during these periods. This
dramatically reduces bandwidth usage, so this parameter should be Enabled
(default setting).
Jitter-The amount of delay (in msec) in sending voice packets. Used to
accommodate jitter (or variable delay) in an IP network. If not set properly
voice may sound choppy.
Packet Size-The number of voice windows included within HDLC on an IP
Packet. It generally reduces packet loss and bandwidth needs, but it will cause
some additional delay in voice delivery.
Packet Trace-Used for debug purposes only.
Calculating Jitter and Compression
Calculating the Number of EXTended phones
Using a single ISDN line, you will only be able to extend a maximum of 8 phones using G.729a
compression. If you plan to extend more than 8 phones, then you will need more bandwidth, in
other words another ISDN Line and another set of ISDN TAs.
The Jitter time should be set to a multiple of the Voice Packet Size Time Equivalent. The Voice
Packet Size Time Equivalent is the amount of time, in milliseconds (ms) of the combined voice
packets.
For example, if using G729A (where each voice packet is equivalent to 10 ms of time) and have a
packet size of 2, then the Voice Packet Size Time Equivalent value is 20 ms (2 packets x 10 ms
for a G729A voice packet). We recommended Jitter settings should be multiples of 20 ms.
Minimum Jitter
•
IP only: 2 multiples of Voice Packet Size Time Equivalent should be needed
•
Sync only: 1 multiple of Voice Packet Size Time Equivalent should be needed
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
63
•
Async only: 3 multiples of Voice Packet Size Time Equivalent should be needed
The other option is setting the path on the Gateway unit to “Dynamic”. If using dynamic voice you
may need to increase the multiple number by one, in turn increasing the Jitter Delay. We
recommend using the Dynamic setting for the Async setup to avoid Remote Login problems, due
to lack of bandwidth.
Path: Gateway->Configuration->Port->Default->Voice
The following menu appears:
Figure 18: Voice Menu
Note: This does not mean that all of the ports can go off-hook and be in use at the same time.
Therefore it is recommended, that the path be left at Constant and if you plan to extend more
than 10 phones, use two ISDN Lines.
Procedure
1. Access the Voice Menu for the specific phone port from the main menu using the following path:
Path:
Gateway->Configuration->Port->Default->Voice
The following menu appears:
Figure 19: Voice Menu
2. Press the → key to access the Method parameter and press the → key to scroll through the
various compression methods available.
3. Press the → key to access the Path parameter and press the → key to select Constant or
Dynamic.
4. (Avaya Only) Press the ↓ key to the DTMF parameter. Select In-Band and Out-of-Band.
5. Press the ↓ key to the Attenuation to limit the amount of echo you may hear during a call.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
64
7. Press the ↓ key to the Silence Detection. When enabled, the Gateway detects silent periods
during a conversation, and as a result sends no data during these periods. This dramatically
reduces bandwidth usage, so this parameter should be Enabled.
8. Press the ↓ key to the Jitter Delay parameter and set to 20 or greater if using RVP_IP.
Otherwise leave at 0.
9. Press the ↓ key to the Packet Size parameter and set to 2. May need to increase to 4 if using
RVP_IP.
10. Press the ↓ key to the Packet Trace parameter. Enabling this allows you to trace lost voice
packets. This is used for debugging and diagnostic purposes.
11. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
11. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter.
12. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
65
Enabling/Disabling Telephony Ports (Gateway and Remote)
The system administrator can disable unused phone ports through the MI. The following
procedure describes the process for disabling individual phone ports.
Note: The Port-><Default> setting enables all 12 or 8 ports.
Procedure
1. Access the specific Port Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration-> Port->Port 1 through 8 ->Port 1
The following menu appears:
Figure 20: Enabling a Port
2. Press the → key to change the parameter of the port. Choices are: Enabled (Yes), or (No), or
<default>.
3. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
4. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter.
5. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
66
Setting a Connect Password (Gateway and Remote)
A connect password provides an authorized link between the Remote unit and the PBXgateway.
A Connect Password restricts access to the phone port and is matched to the User ID. Both must
be entered for access.
Note: A Connect password is required at the Branch site if the System Administrator has set the
password at the PBXgateway.
Procedure
1. Access the Port Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration-> Port->Port 1 through 8->Port 1
The following menu appears:
Figure 21: Default Menu
2. Press the → key and ↓ key to access the Password parameter.
3. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
Assign a connect password (16 characters maximum) using the following guidelines:
!
Security Alert:
Passwords should be hard to guess and therefore should not contain:
•
all the same numbers
Example: 88888888
sequential numbers
Example: 987654321
•
number strings associated with you or with the remote user or with your business. These
include:
Birthdays
Telephone numbers
Social security numbers
•
Passwords should be changed regularly, at least on a quarterly basis. Do not recycle old
passwords.
Note: The Connect password assigned to the Remote unit must match the password
assigned by the system administrator, otherwise, each user will be prompted individually
for the connect password on their phones (not recommended). Keep the password in a
safe place.
4. Press the ↓ key to the Save option and press Enter.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
67
Set User ID (Gateway and Remote)
The PBXgateway is wired to 8 or 12 different digital lines on the PBX. Each of these lines reflects a
remote user extension. If remote users are connected through different Remote units or EXTenders, it
is important to “Map” the extensions to the appropriate remote user. This is accomplished by using a
User ID. A User ID is a text field that identifies which user is connected to which digital port on the PBX.
Note: User IDs override the Port Matching.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
By default, ‘Port Matching’ is enabled in the PBXgateway, and Port X (1 -8) on the Remote unit will
connect to Port X (1-8) of the PBXgateway (i.e. matching the port number). Also, if a remote user
enters a numeric value (1-8) as a User ID on the remote phone, the phone will be connected to that
port number of the PBXgateway.
To override this 'Port Matching' functionality and enforce the usage of User ID assignment for security
purpose; use the following path to disable the 'Port Matching' on the PBXgateway:
Path: Gateway>Configuration>Connect>Port Matching
Procedure
1. Access the specific Port Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration-> Port->Port 1 through 8
The following menu appears:
Figure 22: Port Selection Screen
3. Press the → and ↓ key to User ID parameter.
4. Type in the User ID for the port.
Note: It is recommended that the User ID reflect the phone port, extension, or name of the remote
user.
5. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
6. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter.
7. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt or .rmt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
68
Set Port Description (Gateway and Remote)
The Description parameter provides 15 characters of text to identify the user or specific
port. It is used for administration purposes only.
Example: If Shauna Robar’sextension (5637) is connected to Port 1 on the PBXgateway,
the Port Description field for port 1 could be set to: SRobar
Procedure
1. Access the specific Port Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration-> Port->Port 1 through 8
The following menu appears:
Figure 23: Port Selection Screen
2. Press the → and ↓ key to the Description parameter.
3. Type in the Description for the port.
Note: It is recommended that the Description parameter reflect the user connected to the specific
phone port.
4. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
5. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter.
6. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt or .rmt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
69
WAN Port Set up (Gateway and Remote)
The PBXgateway and Remote have two WAN ports (WAN 1 and WAN 2)
used for a synchronous or asynchronous-serial connection. The ports
communicate via an RS-232, RS-530 or V.35 interface and provide the
connections to the third party network devices.
Introduction
Note: Used for RVP_Direct only.
Enabling/Disabling WAN ports- Individually Enable or Disable a specific
WAN port.
Settings
Note: It is recommended that you disable ports not in use.
Setting the Interface Mode - Choose the interface signaling type
(synchronous or asynchronous) used to communicate with the network
device.
SynchronousSerial
Setting the Sync Rate – Sets the specific WAN port to the sync rate
(synchronous serial port transfer speed) of the network device
(CSU/DSU). (refer to page 71)
Asynchronous- Setting the Async Parameters – Sets the required parameters to match
the specific asynchronous device connected to the WAN port.
Serial
Enabling/Disabling WAN Ports
Procedure
1. Access the WAN 1 or WAN 2 Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration->WAN-> WAN 1 or WAN 2
The following menu appears.
Figure 24: WAN Menu
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the → key to change the availability of the port to: Enabled (Yes) or Disabled (No).
Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter.
Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt or .rmt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
70
Setting the WAN Sync Rate (Gateway and Remote)
Procedure
1. Access the WAN 1 or WAN 2 Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration->WAN-> WAN 1 or WAN 2
2. Press the → key to access the parameters.
Figure 25: WAN Menu
3. Press the → key to the Sync Rate parameter and type in the correct Sync rate. This
parameter sets the synchronous data transfer speed of the WAN port and must match the
network device speed.
Note: This Sync Rate information, displayed in bytes, must be obtained through the network
device documentation and corresponds to network rate.
4. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
5. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter.
6. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt or .rmt) file.
Setting the Mode - Signaling Protocol – (Gateway and Remote)
Procedure
1. Access the WAN 1 or WAN 2 Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration->WAN-> WAN 1 or WAN 2
The following menu appears. Press the → key to access the parameters
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
71
Figure 26: WAN Menu
2. Press the ↓ key to the Mode parameter. This parameter must match the protocol (V.35, RS530, or RS-232) used by the network device connected to the WAN port. Press the → key to
scroll through the available protocols.
3. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
4. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter. Press Enter to save changes to the active config
(.swt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
72
Setting the Async Parameters (Gateway and Remote)
Procedure
1. Access the WAN 1 or WAN 2 Menu using the following path;
Path:
->Configuration->WAN 1 or 2->Async_Setup
The following menu appears.
2. Press the → key to access the parameters.
Figure 27: Async_Setup Menu
3. Press the → key to the DCE Type parameter. Press the → key to select the network device
being used. A list of recommended devices is in the table below.
MFG
TA’s (for Async)
Motorola
Adtran
3Com
TA’s (for Sync 128k bonding) Motorola
Adtran
Paradyne
CSU/DSU’s
Adtran
General
DataComm
RAD
ADC Kentrox
Motorola
Larscom
Orion
Table 13:
Model(s)
(see note)
Bitsurfr Pro
Bitsurfr Pro EZ
ISU 128 (see note)
ISU 2X64
Express 3000
Express NTU
ISDN TA
Bitsurfr Pro
ISU 128 (see note)
ISU 2X64
Acculink 3165
7110 SNMP
TSU LT
DeskTop 554A
FCD-1L
DataSmart Max
72761, 78640
FT100S
56/T1
DCE Models
Note: In order for the Async-RS 232 Dial feature to work properly for these devices, you need
to set each device to “RS232”, and setup each device to accept incoming “AT Commands”.
Consult the documentation provided with each device for proper instructions.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
73
4. Press the ↓ key to the Async Rate parameter. This parameter sets the asynchronous data
transfer speed of the WAN port and must match the network device speed.
Note: This Async Rate should be left at the <default> setting of 115200.
5. Press the ← and ↓ key for each of the Phone Numbers parameters.
Note: Press the → key to enter the appropriate information provided by the system
administrator.
ISDN Switch Type parameter. Select the type of Central Office (CO) switch being used
for the ISDN connection.
Local Dialing Num1 parameter. Enter the DN 1 number assigned to the ISDN line.
ISDN SPID 1 parameter. Enter SPID 1assigned to the first ISDN B-channel.
Local Dialing Num2 parameter. Enter the DN 2 number assigned to the ISDN line.
ISDN SPID 2 parameter. Enter SPID 2 assigned to the second ISDN B-channel.
Dial Prefix parameter. Enter the dial prefix for outgoing calls on this WAN port.
Figure 28: Async_Setup – Phone_Numbers
6. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
7. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter. Press Enter to save changes to the active config
(.rmt) file.
Problems with Remote Login from Gateway – Async Setup
Problems may arise with the Async setup when attempting to perform a Remote login from the
Gateway, when Call Suspend has been enabled.
To allow for Remote Login from the PBXgateway, ensure that Silence Detection is enabled and the
Path is set to Dynamic. If set to Constant, there is not enough bandwidth available for the remote
login to occur.
Note: Only use Constant for selected ports that must always have voice path available, this will
limit how many ports you can extend and could prevent being able to Rlogin.
Path:
Gateway->Configuration->Port_X-Y->Port_X (or Default Port)->Voice
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
74
Figure 29: Async Remote Login Settings
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
75
Setting the IP Parameters (Gateway and Remote)
IP Address Parameters
An Internet Protocol (IP) address and associated routing parameters must be entered within the
IP menu to locate the PBXgateway on the LAN (Local Area Network) over an IP connection. This
is required to manage the PBXgateway using Telnet or to configure the PBXgateway to use
RVP_IP.
Note: The IP address (as well as any required mask or router addresses) must be provided by
the network administrator.
Procedure
1. Access the IP Menu using the following path;
Path:
->Configuration->IP ->Address
The following menu appears:
Figure 30: Address Menu
2. Press the → key to access the parameters
Note: The following parameters must be assigned by the network administrator.
3. Press the → key to the Address parameter. Enter the IP Address of the PBXgateway and
press Enter.
4. Press the ↓ key to the Subnet Mask parameter. Enter the IP Address of the Subnet Mask
and press Enter.
5. Press the ↓ key to the Default Router parameter. Enter the IP Address of the Default Router
and press Enter.
6. Press the ← and ↓ key to the Save option.
7. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
76
Rlogin & Login via IP (Gateway and Remote)
This parameter allows for Remote Login Access from another EXTender or Gateway unit,
assuming that both units are active. Rlogin will use whatever the connect type has been set to.
Alternatively you may use the Login via IP feature to log into an EXTender by specifying the
Remote’s IP address. This IP address is configured in the IP menu.
Procedure
1. Access Rlogin configuration using the following path:
Path
->Configuration->IP
2. Press the ↓ key to select Rlogin.
Figure 31: Rlogin
2. Press the → key to toggle between Enabled and Disabled.
3. Save your changes.
Using Rlogin
1. From the main menu select Remote Login. A list of remotes will appear.
Figure 32: Remote Login
2. Use the ↓ to select a remote and press Enter.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
77
Telnet/FTP Set up (Gateway and Remote)
The PBXgateway can be configured through a Telnet session and files can be saved or
retrieved through an FTP session.
Telnet
By default, Telnet is Enabled. Disabling it will prevent anyone from accessing the unit through
Telnet.
FTP
By default, FTP is disabled. Disabling it will prevent anyone from saving files to or retrieving files
from the unit through FTP. This is normally done to upgrade the unit’s software.
Enabling/Disabling Telnet
1. Access the IP Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration->IP
The following menu appears:
Figure 33: Telnet/FTP
2. Press the → and ↓ key to the Telnet parameter. Toggle the Telnet parameter between Enabled and
Disabled.
3. Press the ← key to go accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu
4. Press the ↓ key to the Save option.
5. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt or .rmt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
78
Web Server Set up
Configure the PBXgateway using a standard web server over an existing LAN connection. This feature
provides the system administrator complete management capabilities as well as status information for
both WAN and PORT connections.
IMPORTANT:
All IP parameters for the Remote must be configured before the web server session can be established.
The Remote must be connected to the LAN via the LAN port. The Remote must be powered up and
online.
Procedure
1. Access the Management Interface (MI) using a Telnet session or via the Console Port.
2. Access the Web Server parameter using the following path:
Path: Configuration->IP->Web Server
Figure 1:
Enabling the Web Server
3. Select YES for Enabled. Set the Timeout to 30.
4. Save the settings and Log out.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
79
Enabling/Disabling FTP (Gateway and Remote)
1. Press the → and ↓ key to the FTP parameter. Toggle the FTP parameter between Enabled and
Disabled.
2. Press the ← key to go accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu
3. Press the ↓ key to the Save option.
4. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt or .rmt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
80
DNS Set up (Gateway and Remote)
The Domain Name System (DNS) is used in IP networks for translating host domain names (ie:
MCK.com) into IP addresses. Basically, if you are not sure of the IP address of the device you are trying
to connect to, and there is a DNS server on the network with DNS enabled, simply type in the name of
the device and the IP address will be displayed.
Settings
The following DNS settings are required:
Enabled- This simply enables or disables the parameter.
Server IP Address – This is the IP Address of the DNS. Used to resolve names to IP
addresses.
Domain Name – Name assigned to the network subnet on which the DNS server
resides.
Note: At this time, DNS is not required for any PBXgateway or Remote unit operation.
Therefore, we recommend leaving this parameter disabled.
Enabling/Disabling DNS (Gateway and Remote)
1. Access the IP Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration->IP -> DNS
The following menu appears:
Figure 34: DNS Menu
2. Press the → key to the Enabled parameter. Enabled (Yes) or (No).
3. Press the → and ↓ key to the Domain Name parameter. Type in the name of the domain
that the PBXgateway belongs to. Example: MCK.com
Note: The Domain name must be provided by the network administrator.
4. Press the and ↓ key to the Server IP Address. Type in the address of the server that the
PBXgateway belongs to.
Note: The Server IP Address must be provided by the network administrator.
5. Press the ← key to go accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu. Press the ↓
key to the Save option.
6. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt or .rmt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
81
System Parameters
Assign a Name to the Unit (Gateway and Remote)
The MI provides a means of identifying the Gateway/EXTender on the network. This
procedure explains the method of assigning a name to the PBXgateway for identification
purposes.
Note: This name is used strictly for ID purposes only. It is not an IP host name.
Procedure
1. Access the System Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration->System
This is where the name of
the Gateway is displayed.
The following menu appears:
Figure 35: System Menu
2. Assign a Name to the PBXgateway continued
3. Press the → key and type in a name for the PBXgateway.
Note: The name must not exceed 20 characters.
4. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
5. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter.
6. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.rem or .swt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
82
Console Baud (Gateway and Remote)
The Console Baud is the speed at which information is transmitted to and from the
PBXgateway/EXTender through the console port (DB-9) located on the front of the unit.
Note: This setting must match the baud rate of the PC serial port connected to the console
port.
Gateway Procedure
1. Access the System Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Configuration->System
The following menu appears:
Figure 36: System Menu
2. Press the ↓ key to the Console Baud parameter.
3. Press the → key to modify the setting. The <Default> setting is 9600.
4. Press the → key to the Modem Init String. This is the AT Command used to initialize the modem.
5. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
6. Press the ← key to the Save parameter.
7. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.swt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
83
System Parameters - Remote Only
1. Access the System Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
Remote->Configuration->System
The following menu appears:
Figure 37: Gateway Time Offset - Remote System Menu
2. Select Use Gateway Time. When enabled [Yes], the EXTender will use the PBXgateway
time to stamp all logging once connected to the PBXgateway.
3. Enter a value the represents the time difference between the Remote and the
PBXgateway. This is used to compensate for a time difference between cities. For example
the Gateway is at a corporate office in Boston and the Remote is in Calgary. Set the value
to -2. A call made from Boston to Calgary at 10:00am central time will show up as 8:00am
mountain time. This will ensure that the time stamp on logs as well as the time appearing
on your phone set will be correct.
4. Press the ↓ key to the Console Baud parameter. Press the → key to modify the setting.
Note: The <Default> setting is 9600.
5. Press the → key to the Modem Init String. This is the AT Command used to initialize the
modem.
6. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
7. Press the ← key to the Save parameter.
8. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.rmt) file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
84
Utilities (Gateway and EXTender)
Setting the Date (Gateway and EXTender)
The Real Time Clock (RTC) provides an accurate date/time stamp for log messages and
statistics used in the Management Interface (MI) in both the Remote and Gateway. The time is
displayed using a 24 hour clock.
Example:
Date: September 10, 2004
Time: 14:49:24 (no a.m. or p.m.- 24 hour clock)
Procedure
1. Access the Set Date Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Utilities->System->Set date
The following menu appears:
Figure 38: Set Date Menu
2. Press the ↓ key to access each parameter and fill in the appropriate information as required.
Note: Press the → key to scroll through the choices for Month.
3. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the System menu.
Note: The PBXgateway and EXTender 6000 preserve their date and time even when power is lost.
The EXTender 4000 will lose its date and time after loss of power but will retain it once it connects to
a Gateway.
Set Enet Mode (Gateway and EXTender)
The Set Enet Mode parameter on the Gateway and Remote allows you to select the AUX LAN or LAN
mode.
Procedure:
1. Select Set Enet Mode using the following path:
Path:
Utilities->System->Set Enet Mode
2. The LAN setting will be displayed. Hit Enter to continue.
3. Set LAN Mode to either 10 Mb-Half Duplex, 100 Mb-Half Duplex or Auto.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
85
Setting the Administrator’s Password (Gateway and EXTender)
The administrator password provides access to the Management Interface
How the
administrator (MI). It is very important to set up an initial administrator password because the
password work units are shipped without one programmed. You should set an administrator’s
password for both the Branch Office unit and PBXgateway for security
reasons.
!
Administrator
Password
Guidelines
Security Alert:
Passwords should be hard to guess and therefore should not contain:
all the same numbers or characters
Example: 88888888 or aaaaaaaa
sequential numbers or characters
Example: 987654321 or abcdefg
number strings associated with you or with the remote user or with your
business. These include:
Birthdays
Telephone numbers
Social security numbers
Passwords should be changed regularly, at least on a quarterly basis. Do not
recycle old passwords.
Procedure
1. Select Set Password from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
->Utilities->System->Set Password
You will be prompted to enter the Old Password. Note that there is no default admin password.
2. Press Enter. You will be prompted to enter the New Password.
3. Assign an administrator password keeping the length of password to 16 characters.
4. Type in New password and Press Enter.
5. You will be prompted to confirm the New Password, press Enter.
6. When the password has been changed, “Password changed” appears on the screen.
7. Press the ← key to go back to the System Menu.
Note: Write the password down, and keep in a secure place.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
86
Resetting Ports (Gateway and EXTender)
There may be times when a port, or all the ports have to be reset on the EXTender 6000.
Resetting ports may cause damage to the older phones as the voltage parameters for older
versus new phones differ.
Remote Only: To reset port on a remote that has a variety of older and newer models, unplug
all phones. Not doing this will result in damage to the phones. Note: This applies to the
Remote unit only.
Procedure
1. Login into the Extender or Gateway.
Path:
→Utilities→Diagnostics→Reset Port
Figure 39: Diagnostic Menu
2. Press → and enter an individual port number or type in ‘all’.
Figure 40: Reset Port
3. Press Enter. A warning appears telling you that “All connections on all ports will be lost” or if
you selected a single port to reset “All connections on Port_x will be lost”.
Figure 41: Reset Port - Warning
4. Enter Y if you are prepared to lose connections on all ports. It is best to perform this task
during business down hours.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
87
Optional PBXgateway Parameters
The following pages describe helpful but optional parameters. Refer to these parameters when needed.
2:1 Configuration
Included in this release is the ability to connect two EXTender 6000 remote units, using RVP_Direct to the
two WAN ports of the PBXgateway.
Typical Installation
The first EXTender 6000 is connected to WAN1 of the PBXgateway. The second EXTender 6000 is
connected to WAN2 of the PBXgateway. This must be the configuration; otherwise warning log messages
will be logged.
Configuring the Gateway and Remote
1. In the “RVP_Direct” menu, set the Number of Remotes to [2].
Figure 42: Number of Remote in 2:1
2. In the “WAN 2” menu, enable WAN 2.
3. Set the WAN Mode. See page 70.
4. Set the Sync Setup parameters. See page 71.
Figure 43: Enabling WAN
3. Reboot the PBXgateway.
IMPORTANT: You cannot “Rlogin” to either remote unit until each remote has at least one phone
connected. And WAN stats shows Active.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
88
Configuring the Remote Units (RVP_Direct)
When configuring the remote units for 2:1 operation, you need to set the Remote Number and
Gateway Port Offset parameters correctly.
For example, if you are using two 8-user remotes, PBXgateway ports 1 through 8 will be for the
first unit, and ports 9 through 16 will be for the second remote.
1. When configuring the first remote unit, set the Remote Number parameter to 1.
2. When configuring the second remote unit, set the Remote Number parameter to 2, and set
the Gateway Port Offset parameter to 8.
Path: Remote ->Configuration -> Connect -> Gateway Port Offset
Figure 44: Gateway Port Offset
3. After rebooting the units, ports 9 through 16 from the PBXgateway will be assigned to the
second remote unit.
4. Set the Port Compression for WAN 1 and WAN 2 to provide adequate bandwidth for the
phones extended off of each remote. Default setting ADPCM32.
Gateway ->Port->Default->Voice
Determining Compression for 2:1 Configuration
The best voice quality is achieved by using the ADPCM 32 compression. The maximum quality
comes at the expense of the highest utilized bandwidth. The largest voice compression is
achieved by using G.729A. If you are using this algorithm, you will save on bandwidth and still
achieve voice quality that is regarded as near toll. If absolute conversation quality is your focus
and bandwidth is no object, you probably want to select ADPCM 32. If bandwidth is a priority you
will employ G.729A.
The compression for both WAN ports does not have to be the same. WAN1 may have 4 phones
extended, while WAN2 may have 8. Set the Method (Compression) for each port, or use the
default port menu.
If you are using different compression algorithms for each individual user (port), use the following
formula to establish your aggregate data bandwidth needs.
A x 16 + B x 32 + C x 40 = D
A: number of G.729A Users
B: number of ADPCM 24 Users
C: number of ADPCM 32 Users
D: Total Bandwidth
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
89
Divide this bandwidth by either 64 or 56, in order to establish the correct number of DS0 channels to be
used.
Example: If your DS0s on your CSU/DSUs are set up for 56Kbps, use 56 and if they are set up for
64Kbps DS0s, use 64.
Configuring the Remote Units (RVP_Over_IP)
When configuring the remote units for 2:1 operation, you need to set the Remote Number. With
RVP_Over_IP instead of using the Gateway Port Offset parameters to distinguish ports on each remote
the Port User ID’s may used as well, to determine what ports on the Remote will match up to what ports
on the Gateway.
Figure 45: User IDs – 2:1 RVP_Over _IP
Note: Remote User ID’s must match Gateway User ID’s.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
90
Simultaneous Direct and Telnet Connections to the MI
The PBXgateway/EXTender now supports the configuration that combines the use of RVP and
RVPoIP. In this configuration it will be possible to connect Branch Office EXTender remote
modules using RVP and have other client modules connected to the same PBXgateway using
RVPoIP, simultaneously.
Dial-Up Management Console and Modem Support (Gateway and Remote)
The PBXgateway software supports the Zmodem protocol on the Management Interface console
port. Support for this protocol will allow software upgrades to be uploaded into a
PBXgateway/Branch unit through the console port. Included is support for accessing the
Management Interface on the PBXgateway and EXTender 6000 units through a dial-up modem
connected to the DB9 console port. The system administrator can access the Management
Interface by dialing into a Fax modem over an analog phone line. The modem is connected to
the Branch/PBXgateway via a non-standard DB25 to DB9 cable, which will allow the
administrator to log into the Management Interface and access the full functionality of the MI.
When the system administrator has finished using the MI they may log out and disconnect, or
simply disconnect the connection, which will automatically log them out of the MI.
Note: Refer to the PBXgateway Installation Guide for more information on setting up the Dial-Up
Management Console.
Zmodem Connection
The PBXgateway Modem port provides connectivity to a Zmodem for remote configuration. This
connection allows access to all features and functions of the MI and the ability to configure,
monitor and troubleshoot the unit from a remote location.
Required Cable
RS-232, DB25 to DB9 modem cable [male-male] (see pinout information, below). Use this cable
to connect the modem to the modem port on the front of the unit.
Modem Connection
DB-9 Modem Port
LNK
Console
Port Status
WAN
PWR 1
2
3 Reset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
CLN
Figure 46: DB-9 Modem Port
Modem Pinout Information
DB25 Male
Pin
Function
2
Tx
3
Rx
7
Common
8
DCD
20
DTR
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
DB9 Male
Pin
Function
2
Rx
3
Tx
5
Common
7
RTS
8
CTS
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
91
Modem DIP Switch (Gateway and Remote)
The modem used for remote access may have a DIP switch located somewhere on the outside of
the unit. This switch controls modem functionality. Below is an example of the settings required
for a US Robotics 33.6 Fax modem (not supplied). These switches must be set prior to
installation.
Table 14:
Switch #
(US Robotics 33.6 Fax Modem) DIP Switch Settings
Function
Setting
UP
1
DTR Normal mode
2
3
4
Verbal result codes
Display result codes
No echo on offline
commands
Auto answer ON
Carrier Detect (CD)
normal
UP
DOWN
DOWN
Load HVRAM
Defaults
Smart Mode
DOWN
5
6
7
8
UP
UP
DOWN
Description
Computer must provide DTR signal for
modem to accept commands: dropping
DTR terminates a call.
Suppress echo.
Modem answers on first ring, or higher.
Modem sends CD signal when it
connects with another modem, drops
CD on disconnect.
Not used for modem connection to MCK
equipment.
Reads network settings.
Modem Connection Procedure
1. Connect the analog phone line to the modem.
2. Plug the modem cable (provided with the modem) into the back of the modem.
3. Power-up the modem. The modem will run through a series of self-diagnostic tests.
4. Plug the other end of the modem cable into the port labeled “Console” on the front of the
PBXgateway.
5. The modem status LED for “Data Terminal Ready” should be lit RED indicating the modem is
ready to receive data.
Note: Refer to the Modem User’s Guide for specific LED information.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
92
Type of Service Support
The PBXgateway software supports the Type of Service packet prioritization protocol. When an
EXTender is running in RVPoIP mode the system administrator can choose to use Type of
Service to prioritize voice packets within the network (note that all nodes in the network must be
configured to prioritize traffic based on Type of Service in order for this feature to function
properly).
Each RVPoIP voice packet contains a ToS (type of service) byte. Within this byte are three bits,
which are the class of service field. The class of service field is always automatically set to low
delay for RVPoIP voice packets by the EXTender. Also within the ToS byte are three bits for
Differentiated Services. With the Type of Service implementation the system administrator is
given the option of choosing how the 3 Type of Service bits are set. These bits will tag the traffic
among other packets that have the class of service field set to low delay, according to the way the
customer has configured their network to prioritize Type of Service traffic.
Figure 47: Type of Service
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
93
Setting up Call-Suspend (Gateway and Remote)
The Call Suspend feature allows the telecom manager to reduce communication costs by
bringing down the ISDN/IP connection when all phones are inactive for a configurable period of
time. When the line is disconnected the phones indicate that they are in the Call Suspend mode.
Whenever a user goes off-hook or an incoming call occurs, the ISDN/IP connection is brought
back up and all phones are taken out of Call Suspend mode.
The Call Suspend feature operates with the assumption that if the ISDN connection is brought
down, it is possible to get busy signals from the ISDN/IP network preventing the EXTenders from
communicating and causing an interruption of telephone service to the branch office. This
assumption leads to setting the Call Suspend timer to a value that does not allow the ISDN/IP
connection to go down during normal business hours.
The expected usage pattern for the ISDN/IP connection is that at the beginning of the business
day, the phones are brought out of Call Suspend mode bringing up the IDSN/IP connection when
the first user either goes off-hook or an incoming call arrives. The ISDN/IP connection remains up
for the remainder of the business day because all phones are not idle longer than the Call
Suspend timeout value. At the end of the day, all phones become inactive for the Call Suspend
timeout value and the ISDN/IP connection is brought down. If anyone works late or comes in
early, normal usage brings up the ISDN/IP connection again.
Procedure for Avaya and Meridian (Gateway and Remote)
Note: When using an RVP_Direct connection, and Call Suspend is enabled, all ports will have
call suspend enabled. If using and RVP_Over_IP connection Call Suspend can be enabled on a
port-by-port basis.
1. Access the Call_Suspend Menu using the following path;
Path: Remote->Configuration->Connect->RVP_Direct->Call_Suspend
Path: Remote->Configuration->Connect->RVP_over_IP->Default_Port
Or for individual ports:
Path: Remote->Configuration->Connect->RVP_Direct->Port_x-y->Port_x
The following menu appears.
Figure 48: RVP_Direct Call Suspend
2. Press the → key to access the parameters.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
94
Figure 49: RVP_Over_IP Call Suspend
3. Press theÆ key to the Enabled parameter. Press the → key to select Yes.
Figure 50: Call_Suspend Settings
4. Press the Èand Ækey to the Timeout parameter. This parameter causes the units to go into
Call Suspend mode when no activity occurs for the set Timeout value. Set the value between
15 and 240 minutes.
5. Press the È and Ækey to the Minimum Connect Time parameter. Enter a value, in minutes
(0 –240) that the EXTender will be connected to the Gateway before falling into Call
Suspend.
6. Press the È and Ækey to the Remote Only Wakeup parameter. If you set this parameter to
Yes, you enable wakeup from Call Suspend on activity at the Branch site only (for example,
when a telephone set goes off-hook or a key is pressed). If you set this parameter to No
(disabled), incoming calls can also cause wakeup from Call Suspend.
7. Press the Èand Æ key to the Mode parameter. This sub-menu sets the Call Suspend mode
for each port. The choices are Ring, or Lamp.
Note: Use Ring mode for non-ACD sets, and use “Lamp” for ACD sets.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
95
8. If you have selected Lamp mode for any ports, press the È and Ækey to the Indicators
parameter. This parameter sets the Lamp indicators that you want to monitor on the
telephone.
Note: Normally you should select call-appearance Lamps.
9. If the Remote has ACD sets with Headsets, press the È and Ækey to the ACD Tone
parameter. Enable the ACD Tone for each port that has an ACD telephone with Headset.
10. Press the Åkey to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
12. Press the Èkey to the Save parameter. Press Enter to save changes to the active config
(.rem) file.
13. Make sure the “Dial-up” and “Dialback” numbers are programmed. Use the table below:
PBXgateway
Configuration → WAN
Remote
Configuration → WAN
Remote
Configuration → Connect → RVP_Direct
Remote
Configuration →Connect → RVP_Over_IP
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Local dialing Numbers
SPID Numbers
Dial Prefix
Local dialing Numbers
SPID Numbers
Dial Prefix
Dialback Num1
Dialback Num2
Primary Dial Nums
Secondary Dial Nums
Ports_1-8 → Port_1
• IP Destination
96
Procedure for Norstar (Gateway and Remote)
1. Access the Call_Suspend Menu using the following path;
Note: When using an RVP_Direct connection, and Call Suspend is enabled, all ports will
have call suspend enabled. If using and RVP_Over_IP connection, Call Suspend can be
enabled on a port-by-port basis, using individual port values or the <Default> values.
Path: Remote->Configuration->Connect->RVP_Direct->Call_Suspend
Path: Remote->Configuration->Connect->RVP_over_IP->Default_Port
Or for individual ports:
The following menu appears.
Figure 51: RVP_Direct Call Suspend
2. Press theÆ key to the Enabled parameter. Press the → key to select Yes.
Figure 52: RVP_Over IP Call_Suspend Settings
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
97
Figure 53: RVP_Direct Call_Suspend Settings
3. Press the Èand Ækey to the Timeout parameter. This parameter causes the units to go into
Call Suspend mode when no activity occurs for the set Timeout value. Set the value between
15 and 240 minutes.
4. Press the È and Ækey to the Minimum Connect Time parameter. Enter a value, in minutes
(0 –240) that the EXTender will be connected to the Gateway before falling into Call
Suspend.
5. Press the È and Ækey to the Remote Only Wakeup parameter. If you set this parameter to
Yes, you enable wakeup from Call Suspend on activity at the Branch site only (for example,
when a telephone set goes off-hook or a key is pressed). If you set this parameter to No
(disabled), incoming calls can also cause wakeup from Call Suspend.
6. Press the È and Ækey to the Remote Login Timeout parameter. Enter a value, in minutes
(15 – 240) that the EXTender will be in idle, before Call Suspend is enabled.
7. Press the Åkey to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
8. Access the Call Suspend Menu on the Gateway. Set the Num Dials On Reboot, this is the
number of times the Gateway will dial the Remote on a reboot, while in Call Suspend.
Path: Gateway ->Configuration->Connect->RVP_Direct->Call_Suspend
Figure 54: Num Dials on Reboot
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
98
Enabling ConneX
The PBXgateway supports the ConneX features. This application puts PBX features and dialtone
in the hands of users of remote telephones. For instructions on setting up your ConneX phone
please see Appendix F: ConneX Application Guide starting on page 250.
Note: If ADSI (Analog Display Service Interface) enabled phones are being used the user will
have access to all the RemoteConneX features. If Analog or mobile phones are being used by a
remote worker the MobileConneX features will be accessible to the user. The prompts for this
application are very similar but may differ in some instances.
The PBXgateway is an application-specific gateway capable of extending dialtone and features of
the enterprise PBX to up to 12 users of ConneX Phones and/or mobile phones. ConneX features
can be enabled on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Setting the ConneX port values in the default port menu will assign these values, and the
associated ConneX features to all ports. If you wish to use a single port for ConneX then
configure an individual port.
Note: Norstar Only – Set the Handsfree menu item, on the KSU, to None.
DN for Connex_Link = Handsfree = None
DN for Voice = Handsfree = None
Procedure (Gateway Only)
1. (Norstar Only) Access the Port menu and set the CH1 Usage to ConneX_Link. Set this for
the ports that you will be using for ConneX users only. Do not set this in the Default port
menu.
2. (Meridian and Avaya) Access the Port menu and set the CH2 Usage to ConneX_Link. Set
this for the ports that you will be using for ConneX users only. Do not set this in the Default
port menu.
3. (Norstar Only) Create the ConneX Link and Voice on the same DSP. For example select
Port_1 and set the Ch1 Usage to ConneX_Link. Access Port_2 and set the CH1 Usage to
Voice. You can use any two ports in sequential pairs starting at Port_1. So you can use
Port_1 and 2, Port_3 and 4, Port_5 and 6 etc.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
99
IMPORTANT: The Norstar KSU may take up to 5 minutes to initialize. It is recommended
that you wait for this specified time period before attempting to place a call. Not doing this
may result in failed calls.
Path: Gateway->Configuration->Port->Port_x
Figure 55: (Norstar) CH1 Usage - ConneX_Link
Figure 56: (Meridian and Avaya) CH2 Usage - ConneX_Link
Figure 57: CH1 Usage - Voice
4. Access the ConneX Port parameters using the following path:
Path: Gateway->Configuration->Connect -> RVP_ConneX ->Port_x - y
Or
Path: Gateway->Configuration->Connect -> RVP_ConneX ->Default Port
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
100
Figure 58: ConneX – Individual Port
Figure 59: ConneX – Default Port
5. The number of ports configured for ConneX usage will depend on the number of remote
users.
6. Press the → key to the access individual ports, and use the table on the following page to
help you set the values for the port parameters.
7. Access the More parameter. Use the table below to help you select the proper values.
Figure 60: ConneX Parameters
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
101
ConneX Parameters
Table 1:
ConneX Port Parameters
Parameter
Description
Enable
This will enable ConneX features on the selected port. Select No, Yes or
Default.
Dialback Mode
A configurable setting that determines where the PBXgateway routes
your calls. There are four different Dialback Modes and the level of
security varies from one to another: Roaming, Disabled, Fixed and
Fixed/Forced. The System Administrator is the only person who can
change the Dialback Mode.
ConneX Ch Type
This parameter identifies the port the ConneX session will use to
connect the mobile/remote user to the office gateway. In the case of the
Definity or Meridian protocol, the default will be the current digital port’s
B2 channel (PBX_B2_Static). In the case of the Norstar protocol, the
default link port is the adjacent B1 port (PBX_B1_Static)
Note: If this field is set to disable, ConneX capability is disabled.
Dialback Number
The telephone number that the PBXgateway uses to reach you on your
analog or mobile phone. Incoming calls to your office extension are
routed to the dialback number that is currently set. .
Note: Dialback number must include prefix (9+ 1 e. g.) necessary to
access outside line.
Note: If necessary, a comma (,) will be used as a pause in the dialstring.
Idle Timeout
This is the amount of time a channel will be in the Idle mode (connected
but no active calls) before the phone is disconnected. Set this value to
zero to disable the Idle Timeout. Range:0-192 minutes.
Min Password
This parameter ensures the minimum length of the ConneX login
Length
password for security purposes. Also, it provides the following features
for a newly configured user:
The System Administrator can assign a ConneX user an initial password
by entering a value in the Password field of the Port Menu. Also, the
Administrator can let the ConneX user enter their own password by
configuring the 'Min Password Len' parameter. When the user first
attempts to access the ConneX port from their remote phone, they will
be prompted to enter a password with the specified length.
Note: The minimum value for this field is 2 (maximum is 9). To disable
the limitation of password length, leave the field blank.
Properly setting this ring count will ensure calls are routed to your
Corporate Voice Mail instead of your mobile service provider’s voicemail.
Ring count will dictate the number of audible rings the GW will send to
the remote phone, via dialback before going to your corporate voice
mail.
Set this count at least one ring higher then your service provider’s
voicemail ring count. In most cases a Telco will set their voicemail ring
count to 4 rings. We suggest setting this value to at least 5 rings to
ensure your Corporate Voicemail will receive this unanswered call.
Ring Count
More...
ADSI Detection
Enabled, Disabled. Select Enabled only when the remote client is using
an ADSI enabled RemoteConneX Phone. This will enable
RemoteConneX and allow RemoteConneX Phone user to use the
special phone features.
This item is a RemoteConneX specific feature. This parameter is used to
enable or disable the RemoteConneX Phone to display Caller ID
information.
This parameter specifies the PBX line appearance keys for the ConneX
port. Please assign this value according to the PBX configurations for
ADSI CLID
ConneX Line Keys
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
102
this port.
Note: The PBXgateway uses a zero base key mapping. For example, in
Definity PBX key 1 is the first line appearance key, you should assigning
key '0' in the PBXgateway as the line key.
When the EXTender needs to call the ConneX user it needs to know
what key to “press” to access a line and dial the user. Use 0 (zero).
This item is a RemoteConneX specific feature. This parameter is used to
enable or disable the 'Message Waiting Lamp' on the RemoteConneX
Phone.
Note: The lamp indication will only be updated upon login/logout of the
ConneX port.
Assigns Transfer call function to a specific key mapped on the PBX.
ConneX Link Key
(Norstar Only)
RCX Phone Lamp
Transfer Key
(Meridian Only)
Conference Key
(Meridian Only)
Email...
VMWI Email
Assigns Conference call function to a specific key mapped on the PBX.
The SMTP Server must be configured. Please see the procedure below.
Voice Message Waiting Indicator (VMWI). Enabling this feature will
trigger an email to be sent to you every time a voice mail has been left in
your corporate mailbox.
Enabling this feature will trigger an email to be sent to you with the Caller
information. This is useful when you have lost access to your voice
services.
Note, that with Norstar, if you receive a 2nd call while on an active call, an
email will not be sent, the call will behave normally otherwise. It is not
desirable to interrupt the voice path to send this information.
Enter the email address of the ConneX user. Note, that invalid
characters may be entered in this field such as the $ symbol. Ensure you
have entered the correct address. To edit an address simply use your
backspace, delete, right arrow, or left arrow keys to scroll and insert
characters. Press Enter to accept the address.
Call Log Email
Email Address
Configuring the SMTP Server (Gateway Only)
1. Access the SMTP Server Menu using the following path:
Path Gateway->Configuration->IP->SMTP
Figure 61: SMTP Parameters
2. Enter the IP address or Name of your corporate SMTP Server. Ensure DNS has been
enabled and configured when entering name instead of IP Address. See ‘DNS on page’ 81
for details on enabling the DNS service.
3. Enter the email address of the ConneX user in the SMTP Mailbox field. This parameter
specifies the FROM address of the email being sent out. Usually, you would assign a virtual
email address (eg.ConneX@PBXgateway) as a notification to the user who receive the email.
4. Enter the ConneX User Name in the SMTP User field. Ask your System Administrator if you
are unsure if this is required for your SMTP services.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
103
5. Enter a password so the user can access their email. (optional) Ask your System
Administrator if you are unsure if this is required for your SMTP services.
Figure 62: SMTP Server Configuration
Console Setup Wizard (Gateway and EXTender)
A console setup wizard has been created for the PBXgateway and EXTender 6000, and a phone
interface setup wizard has been created for the EXTender 4000. The setup wizard will guide a
user through most of the required programming and configuration required to complete the initial
setup of the units, via the VT100 management console accessed through the DB9 serial port on
the PBXgateway. Parameters not configurable through the wizard can be set through the
Management Interface.
When a unit is first powered up it will check a Setup Wizard flag. If the flag is set then the
standard console UI will be displayed. If the flag is not set then the user will be asked whether
they would like to run the Setup Wizard. After this initial prompt the Setup Wizard flag will be set,
preventing the user from being asked to run the Wizard again. The Setup Wizard can also be
accessed through the console Management Interface in case the user wants to run it later.
Portion of the variables configured through Setup Wizard:
•
Unit Name
•
Region Code
•
PBX Type (Note: This is the only location to set this parameter)
•
Network Connections
•
Enable All Ports
•
Voice Compression
•
IP Configuration
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
104
Login to Alternate Remote Unit (Gateway)
The system administrator can connect to each Remote unit from the PBXgateway through the
“Remote Login” command within the Management Interface (MI). This command allows the
system administrator to access all Remote units for configuration, troubleshooting, and file
transfers.
Procedure
1. Access the Main Menu.
2. Press the ↓ key to select Remote Login and press Enter. A menu will appear displaying the
Remotes that are connected and can be accessed from the PBXgateway.
3. Select the Remote from the list displayed.
Figure 63: Available Remotes
Note: This menu only appears if you run in RVP_IP mode. Otherwise, “Remote Login” just
connects to the corresponding Branch EXTender.
The screen will display:
Connecting………………………, and the Welcome Screen appears for the unit at the alternate site.
Note: You may have to enter the Administrator Password if passwords are used.
The live log window will not automatically update. Press F4 to update the log messages.
You can also do a Gateway login from the Extender by using the same pathway:
Path: Remote -> Gateway Login.
As there is only one Gateway connected to the Remote, no list will appear. You will automatically
access the Gateway welcome screen.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
105
Remote Unit Configuration
Direct Serial Connection (RVP_Direct)
The EXTender 6000 Branch Office unit utilizes a direct serial connection to provide remote
user connectivity. This means that the WAN port is plugged directly into a network device. The
WAN port (WAN 1 or WAN 2) that is used as the main or “primary” port must be identified on
the RVP_Direct menu.
Note: The WAN port must already be enabled and properly configured (see page 70).
Connect Menu – Remote Only
Procedure
1. Access the Connect Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
Remote->Configuration->Connect
2. Set the “Connect Type” to RVP_Direct and access the Menu.
The following menu appears:
Figure 64: RVP_Direct Menu
3. Press the → key to the Primary Interface parameter. This is the main WAN port (usually
WAN1) that connects the Remote unit to the network device.
4. Press the → key to scroll through the choices.
5. Press the ↓ key to the Secondary Interface parameter. This identifies the secondary WAN
port.
Note: This parameter is normally set to None.
6. Press the ↓ key to the Utilization parameter. This parameter is a numeric value that
represents the percentage of bandwidth used by the remote unit. See page 144 for more
information on setting this parameter. This should be left at 100.
7. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
8. Press the ↓ key to the Save option. Press Enter.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
106
IP Connection (RVP_Over_IP) – Remote Only
The EXTender 6000 and the EXTender 4000 Remote units utilize an IP connection to provide
remote user connectivity. This means that the Ethernet port on the back of the unit is plugged
directly into the existing network through an RJ-45 connector.
The PBXgateway IP address must be entered within the Management Interface (MI) of the
Remote unit to locate the PBXgateway within the IP network.
Procedure
1. For the EXTender 4000 Remote unit, access the Connect Menu from the Main Menu using the
following path:
Path:
Remote->Configuration->Connect
The following menu appears:
Figure 65: Connect Type
3. Press the → key to access the IP Destination parameter.
4. Enter the IP address of the PBXgateway.
Note: This address must be assigned by the network administrator.
5. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
6. Press the ↓ key to the Save option. Press Enter.
7. For the EXTender 6000 Branch unit access the Connect Menu from the Main Menu using
the following path:
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
107
Path:
Remote->Configuration->Connect->RVP_Over_IP->Default Port
The following menu appears:
Figure 66: RVP_over_IP Menu
Note: The <Default> setting will connect all ports to the same PBXgateway. Individual ports
can be set to connect to different PBXgateway units by simply selecting the port.
7. Press the → key to the IP Destination parameter.
8. Enter the IP address of the PBXgateway.
Note: Each port can actually have a unique IP Destination if you have multiple PBXgateways.
This address must be assigned by the network administrator.
9. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
10. Press the ↓ key to the Save option. Press Enter.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
108
Customizing Individual Ports (Gateway and Remote)
The system administrator can customize each individual port for phones connected to the
Remote unit. The following parameters are described:
•
Description (See page 131)
•
Auto-Connect
•
ATA (Merdian only)
•
User ID (See page 68)
•
Password
•
Banner
•
Line Signaling (Norstar only)
•
Phone Features – Active Call Monitoring (Norstar Only) See page 116.
•
Logout (Avaya only) See page 111.
•
MSB Key (Merdian only) See page 111.
•
More
Procedure
1. Access the specific Port Menu from the Main Menu using the following path:
Path:
Remote->Configuration->Port->Port_x-y -> Port_x
The following menu appears:
Figure 67: Port Selection Screen
Auto Connect (Remote Only)
This feature attempts to permanently keep the Remote connected to the Gateway and prevents user from
having to press ‘1’ to connect.
1. Press the ↓ key to access the Auto Connect parameter.
2. Press the → key and select, Enabled (Yes), (No), or Default. The Default setting is Auto Connect:
Disabled
3. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
4. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.rem) file.
5. (Meridian Only) Press the ↓ key to access the ATA parameter. Enabled (Yes), if you have an ATA
device present.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
109
Banner (Gateway and Remote)
1. Press the ↓ key to access the Banner parameter.
2. Press the → key and type in a line of text to be displayed on the Remote phones. Example:
Acme Inc.
Note: The description is limited to alphanumeric (1,2,3, a, b, c etc) characters only, and the
total length must not exceed 15 characters.
3. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
4. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter. Press Enter to save changes to the active config
(.rem) file.
Line Signaling (Norstar Remote Only)
Added port support for the Norstar Line Signaling configuration item. This will resolves audio
crackle problems and phone signaling issues. Set the desired Line Signaling value (= duty cycle)
as needed.
Valid range: 0 - 7, default is 2 (50% duty cycle).
Suggested working range is 2 - 5 (56% DC), each value represents a 2% increase: 0 = 46% and
7 = 60%.
Figure 68: Norstar - Line Signaling
Password (Gateway and Remote)
A (connect) password provides a secure WAN link between the PBXgateway and Remote Unit. If
assigned, the connect password must be entered for communication between the PBXgateway
and a Remote unit.
Your password should be alphanumeric only. In other words, only use numbers or letters that are
on the telephone keypad. DO not use symbols such as $, & or *, as these cannot be entered on a
digital deskset keypad.
1. Press the ↓ key to access the Password parameter.
2. Press the → key and type in a password.
!
Security Alert:
Passwords should be hard to guess and therefore should not contain:
•
all the same numbers or characters
•
Example: 88888888 or aaaaaaaa
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
110
•
sequential numbers or characters
•
Example: 987654321 or abcdefg
•
number strings associated with you or with the remote user or with your business. These
include:
Birthdays
Telephone numbers
Social Security numbers
Passwords should be changed regularly, at least on a quarterly basis. Do not recycle old
passwords.
3. Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
4. Press the ↓ key to the Save parameter.
5. Press Enter to save changes to the active config (.rem) file.
Logout Code Set up (Avaya Only)
The Logout Code is the sequence of commands sent to the PBX when you disconnect the
phone port (go offline) from the Branch Unit.
Note: This only applies to the Avaya protocol units.
Procedure
1. Select Logout Code command using the following path:
Path:
Remote->Configuration->Port
2. Press the → key the ↓ key to access the specific port (1-12).
3. Press the → key access the port menu.
4. Press the ↓ key to access the Logout code parameter.
5. The following buttons are used to set the logout code sequence:
Use the Digits 0 through 9 as their own value.
#0 = “D” represents a press of the switchhook.
#1 = “U” represents the release of the switchhook.
Note: The normal on-site operation of logging out your telephone using logout codes is to lift
the receiver, dial the logout code, then hang up. When you program the Logout Code you
must enter the character sequences that simulate the same three actions.
Example: for a logout code of *89, enter #1*89#0.
If your Logout Code begins with a ‘#’ you must precede the Logout Code with a “#’. For example,
for a logout code of #89, enter #1##89#0.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
111
Setting the Make Set Busy Key (Meridian Remote Only)
The MSB (Make Set Busy) key sends a command from the Gateway to the PBX. This command
is used to log agents out of the ACD queue in the event of an abnormal disconnect. This prevents
ACD agents from receiving calls during a network outage. The MSB function is programmed to
represent a button on the telephone which will be pressed in the event of an abnormal
disconnect. In an ACD agent application, this key should be programmed as the Unavailable Key.
In a non-ACD application, this key should be programmed as the Hold/DND or Hold/Quick
Forward Key.
Procedure (Remote Only)
1. Go to any Port menu using the following path as an example:
Path: Remote>Configuration->Port->Ports_1-8->Port_1
The following menu appears:
Figure 69: MSB Key
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the ↓ key to scroll down to the MSB key parameter.
Enter the location of the MSB key on the telephone.
Press the ← key to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
Press the ← key to the Save option. Press Enter.
Setting up the Analog Port (Remote Only)
Note: When using the Analog Port ensure that you selected the correct region using the Setup
Wizard.
The EXTender 6000 may be equipped with an extra RJ-11 port on the back panel. This port is
labeled “Analog” and it provides a connection to an analog telephone line (provided at the remote
location) for the purpose of placing local or emergency calls.
100-240 V ~ 0.8A 50-60 HZ
TELEPHONY INTERFACE
WAN 1
LNK ACT
ANALOG
WAN 2
LAN
LNK
0
LANCLN
Figure 70: Remote – Analog Line
Once the unit is connected to the analog line, the remote user simply presses the assigned key
on the digital telephone and dials the telephone number. Only one remote user can dial out at any
one time.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
112
IMPORTANT: If power to the remote unit fails, the Analog port is not available to the digital
telephones. If another telephone tries to use the analog line while it is busy, it hears a “Busy”
tone.
Procedure
1. Select Analog Card using the following path:
Path: Remote->Configuration->Port_1-8->Port_1->More->911_Analog_Port
The following menu appears:
Figure 71: Individual Port – 911 Analog Port Setup
2. Press the Æ key to enable (Yes) analog port access for all 8 or 12 ports, or press the ↓ key to
set individual ports. You may also set this in the Default Port menu and have all other ports
read from this as the <Default>.
Note: This procedure sets the <Default> setting for all ports.
Figure 72: Default Port - 911 Analog Port Setup
3. Press the Ækey to enable or disable the analog port.
4. Press the Èkey to enable Ring (yes) on incoming analog calls.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
113
5. Access the 911 Analog Key using the following path:
Path: Remote->Configuration->Port_1-8->Port_1->More->Key Mapping
Figure 73: 911 Analog Key Mapping
6. Press the È key to set the numeric “key”, which must be pressed on the remote telephone
before placing an analog call.
Note: Do not use a key that already has a function programmed.
7. Press the Åkey to accept changes and go back to the Configuration Menu.
8. Press the Èkey to the Save option. Press Enter.
System Reboot (Gateway and Remote)
The PBXgateway or any remote can be rebooted through the Management Interface
(MI). This parameter is used for resetting the unit during troubleshooting or software
upgrades. The MI Reboot is a “soft” reboot, which means that the unit is re-started
through the software. A “hard” reboot refers to a re-start by unplugging the unit.
Procedure
1. Select Reboot command using the following path:
Path:
Utilities->System->Reboot
The following Warning appears:
Figure 74: Reboot Warning
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the “y” selection is chosen, the following connections will be
terminated: All active phones, Telnet connection, FTP connection and in-band logins.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
114
Logout (Gateway and Remote)
Procedure
1. Select the Logout parameter from the Main Menu, the following message appears:
Figure 75: Logout Warning
2. The Management Interface (MI) will ask for confirmation. Press Y to ‘Logout’ out of the PBXgateway.
Note: After Configuring a Gateway or Remote you should logout for security reasons.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
115
Active Call Monitoring (Norstar EXTender 6000 Only)
This setting, if enabled, allows a receptionist or other user to monitor active calls unobtrusively and
perform other related tasks such as answering calls for other users, directing calls or voice mail.
This item should be enabled on a port-by-port basis.
Path: Remote -> Configuration -> Port ->Port_x-y -> Port x -> Phone Features -> Active Call Monitoring
Figure 76: Active Call Monitoring
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
116
Chapter 4: The Management Interface (MI)
This Chapter provides information on all parameters within the Management Interface (MI). Information
includes the parameter description, usage, location, and references.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
117
Introduction
This Chapter provides background information for each parameter within the
Management Interface (MI). The parameters are defined using two different
methods:
Parameters listed by menu location
Parameters listed alphabetically using the name displayed within each
menu.
Parameters liste This method sorts all parameters within the MI by the configuration menu on
by menu locatio which the parameter appears. All applicable menus are displayed with
reference information for each parameter.
Note: For information on every parameter within the MI including default
settings and all available values see Appendix A.
The following menus are detailed in this section:
Gateway/Remote units
•
Port Menu
•
Voice Menu
•
WAN Menu
•
Sync Setup
•
Async Setup
•
Connect Menu
•
RVP_Direct Menu
•
RVP_over_IP Menu
•
Log Menu
•
IP Menu
•
Address Menu
•
DNS Menu
•
SNMP Menu
•
Web Server Menu
•
Syslog Menu
•
System Menu
Each entry includes the following support information:
Parameter Location: The Parameter Location text shows you where to find
the parameter within the MI.
Description: the Description text explains the parameter.
Usage: The Usage text explains how to use the parameter.
Example: The Example text shows you an example or setting.
Dependencies: The Dependencies text tells you what other information you
need to configure and use the parameter.
See Also: The See Also text points you to related parameters within the MI.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
118
Gateway & Remote Menus
Port Menu
Port Configuration (Gateway)
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
119
Port Configuration (Remote)
Menu items may vary, depending on protocol.
Figure 77: Meridian Port Configuration Menu
Figure 78: Norstar Port Configuration Menu
Parameter
Enable
Description
Auto Connect
ATA
User ID
Password
Banner
Line Signaling
(Norstar Only)
Phone Features –
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
69
109
109
68
110
110
110
131
128
144
137
129
-
116
-
112
136
Active Call Monitoring.
(Norstar Only)
MSB Key
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
120
Voice Menu (Gateway only)
Parameter
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
Method
Path
Companding
DTMF (Avaya Only)
Attenuation
Silence Detection
Jitter Delay
Packet Size
Packet Trace
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
135
131
134
136
136
WAN Menu (Remote and Gateway)
Parameter
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
Enabled
Mode
Sync Setup
Async Setup
70
71
71
74
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
135
141
128
121
Log Menu (Remote and Gateway)
Parameter
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
Size
Default Priority
SYS Priority
MGMT Priority
NET Priority
PORT Priority
-
140
138
138
138
138
138
IP (Remote and Gateway)
Parameter
Address
Telnet
Rlogin
FTP
DNS
SNMP
Web Server
Syslog
SMTP
Static Routes
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
76
78
77
78
80
99
-
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
128
142
133
131
123
144
123
133
122
SNMP Menu (Remote and Gateway)
Parameter
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
Enabled
Trap Hosts
Trap Priority
Community
Trap path
Sys Contact
Sys Location
-
142
143
130
143
141
142
SysLog Menu (Remote and Gateway)
Parameter
Enabled
Host
ID
Default Priority
SYS Priority
MGMT Priority
NET Priority
PORT Priority
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
-
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
133
133
139
139
139
139
139
123
System Menu (Gateway)
System Menu (Remote)
Parameter
Name
Console Baud
Modem init string
Use Gateway Time
Gateway Time Offset
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
82
83
84
84
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
130
-
124
Utilities->System Menu (Remote and Gateway)
Parameter
Set Password
Set Date
Set Enet Mode
Clear Log
Dump All
Reset Stats
Login via IP
Reboot
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
86
85
85
114
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
129
132
139
-
125
Utilities->File Menu (Remote and Gateway)
Parameter
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
Copy to Remote
(GW)
Copy to Gateway
(Remote)
177
-
Delete
Edit Config
Optimize
Image List
Free Space
175
-
132
136
133
132
Utilities->Upgrade Menu (Remote and Gateway)
Parameter
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
Zmodem Upload
Image File
91
Error! Bookmark not
defined.
174
Default Image
Config File
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
-
126
Remote Menus
Connect->RVP_Direct
Parameter
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
Primary Interface
Primary Dial Nums
Secondary Interface
Secondary Dial Nums
Utilization
Call Suspend
106
106
106
106
106
94
138
140
144
-
Connect->RVP_over_IP Menu
Parameter
To set this parameter
For more information on this parameter
see page
see page
IP Destination
Call Suspend
107
94
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
134
-
127
MI Parameters
Address
(IP->LAN
->Address)
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Configuration->IP->Address
Description: The Internet Protocol (IP) Address
Usage: A 3-bit address used for IP connectivity. When assigned, the IP Address
identifies the PBXgateway and Remote on the network.
Example: 193.245.101.67
Dependencies:
•
Must be assigned by the network administrator
•
IP Address is required for unit management and RVP_IP connections.
•
Must be an assigned static (fixed) address
See Also: Chapter 4 Setting IP Parameters.
Async Rate
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Configuration->WAN->WAN_X->Async_Setup
Description: The asynchronous data transfer rate.
Usage: This parameter identifies the asynchronous data transfer speed of the
WAN port. This value must match the network device speed.
Note: This Async Rate typically would be left at the <default> setting of 115200.
Dependencies: N/A
Auto
Connect
Parameter Location:
Remote->Configuration->Port->Default or Port x
Description: If Enabled, the phone ports automatically connect when the
PBXgateway and Remote units are powered up. This feature also includes a
retry timer with backoff. This means that the unit will wait a few seconds between
retries and will only try and connect up to a minute before it stops.
Usage: No need to press “1” on Remote phone to connect.
Dependencies: Remote unit only
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
128
Banner
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Configuration->Port->Banner
Description: A message or banner is displayed on the Remote phone on powerup or reboot while the phone is offline.
Usage: Used for ID purposes and customization.
Example: Acme Inc.- Service Division
Dependencies:
•
Remote unit only
•
Auto-Connect must be disabled, works with two-wire display phones only.
See Also: Chapter 4 Banner
Begin Test
(IP)
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Utilities->Diagnostics->Test IP
Description: A function that ensures IP communication is working correctly.
Usage: Same as the MS-DOS PING command. Sends packets back and forth
to the unit specified by the IP Address parameter, which is directly below the
Begin Test parameter. Upon successful test completion, messages describing
the test will appear on the screen.
Dependencies: N/A
Begin Test
(WAN)
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Utilities->Diagnostics->Test WAN 1
Description: A function that ensures WAN communication is working correctly.
Usage: Sends packets back and forth over the WAN. Upon successful test
completion, messages describing the test will appear on the screen.
Dependencies: N/A
Clear Log
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Utilities->System->
Description: Clears the log of events that occur on the PBXgateway and
Remote units.
Usage: When you want to clear the log of boot-up and other information that you
don’t need.
Dependencies: N/A
WARNING: Cannot “Undo” this command. Once selected the Log Messages are
permanently removed.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
129
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Configuration->IP->SNMP
Community
Description: Used for SNMP. The Community string can be set to any
character string, but note that a network manager wishing to access a particular
EXTender must use the same Community string. This is only a weak form of
security as this Community string is passed in plain text in each SNMP packet.
Usage: This variable serves as a password to allow Network Managers to read
SNMP information on the EXTender. You should normally set the string to
PUBLIC.
Example: If SNMP is used for control and not for management, we recommend
using “Public” as a read only community string.
Console
Baud
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Configuration->System
Description: Baud rate of the Console port. The correct Console Baud is a data
transfer speed, measured in Kbps (kilobits per second)
Usage: The Console Baud rate is required for the PBXgateway to properly
communicate with a PC via the console (serial) port.
Example: 9600
Dependencies: The Console Baud rate of the PBXgateway must match the PCs
COM (serial) port speed.
Default Router
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Configuration->IP->Address
Description: Enter Internet Protocol (IP) address of the default router to use
to access device not on your network.
Usage: A 3bit address used as part of the complete IP Default gateway
address. When assigned, the default router is used to reach an IP Address
not on the local subnet.
Example: 193.245.101.1
Dependencies: Must be assigned by the network administrator
See Also: IP Network Configuration.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
130
Description
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Configuration->Port->Port 1 - 24
Description: Entering text in this field identifies individual phone ports on the
PBXgateway and Remote.
Usage: The description field provides up to 15 characters for customizing each
port with descriptive text.
Example: Mary Ellen in Dallas TX
See Also: Set Port Description on page 69.
DNS
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Configuration->IP->DNS
Description: Domain Name System (DNS) works in conjunction with a DNS
Server. The DNS server resolves Domain names to IP addresses.
Usage: Use this field to specify the IP address of your DNS Server and the
fully qualified Domain Name.
Example: MCK.com
See Also: DNS Setup on page 80.
DTMF
(Avaya Only)
Parameter Location:
Gateway->Configuration->Port->Voice
Description: DTMF is a signal generated by pressing numbers on the keypad
of a phone. These tones can be sent across the network and received at the
alternate unit as an in-band (voice) signal. The in-band signal is generated by
the PBX/KSU or remote phone.
If the DTMF tone is sent out-of-band (signaling) the DSP on the alternate unit
generates the tone. Enable/Disable sending Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) tones as voice (in-band) as opposed to signaling (out-of-band).
Usage: Out-of-band provides a clearer tone for higher compression algorithms
(G.729A).
Dependencies: Avaya Protocol only.
See Also: DTMF on page 63.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
131
Dump All
Parameter Location:
Gateway/Remote ->Utilities->System
Description: This parameter will dump the entire log and configuration files to
the screen to allow a terminal program to capture the text.
Dependencies: A PC must be connected to the console port.
Usage: This provides an easy way to transfer the log file to a text file on the
PC.
Edit Config
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway->Utilities->File
Description: This is a file saved within the EXTender Flash file system, which
contains all configuration parameters. Use this command to create a new config
file.
Example: Runtime.rem (remote) or Runtime .swt (Gateway)
Dependencies: Must use the correct file type for the unit.
See Also: Editing Non-Active Configuration Files on page 175.
Free Space
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway->File->Free Space
Description: This parameter indicates how much flash file space is available
(bytes) to load another file. Your free space should exceed the size of the file
that you are downloading.
Example: Runtime.rem (remote) or .swt (Gateway)
Dependencies: NA.
See Also: NA
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
132
FTP
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway->Configuration->IP
Description: Enable/Disable File Transfer Protocol (FTP) access.
Usage: When FTP is enabled, files can be transferred to/from the flash file
system via the LAN.
Dependencies:
IP Address
LAN
IP Network
See Also: See page 78 for more info on FTP set up.
Gateway
(Static
Routes)
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway->Configuration->IP->More ->Static Routes>route_x
“x” is a number from 1 to 10.
Description: The IP address of a local router which controls IP traffic to a static
route.
Host
(Syslog)
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway->Configuration->IP->More ->Syslog->More
Description: Used to send Syslog messages to a Syslog Host. Consult with
your O/S vendor regarding configuration information.
ID (Syslog)
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway->Configuration->IP->More ->Syslog
Description: Enter Syslog ID
Image List
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway->->Utilities->File ->Image List
Description: Queries the flash file system for a list of image files.
.rem = Remote, .swt = Switch 9GW) and .mlb = 4000P
Usage: Helps you determine what files are on the Gateway and Remote,
useful when grading
Dependencies: NA
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
133
IP Destination
Parameter Location:
Remote->Configuration->Connect->RVPoIP->Port_x
Description: This is the IP address of the PBXgateway. It is programmed on
remote units.
Usage: When connected over an IP network, it is necessary to provide a
destination address so that the Remote unit can locate the PBXgateway.
Dependencies: Must be assigned by the System Administrator.
Jitter Delay
Parameter Location:
Gateway ->Configuration->Port->Default->Voice
Description: Jitter is the deviation or displacement of voice packets between
network devices. Jitter can cause pops and clicks (noise) in the voice
transmission. The Jitter Delay parameter provides storage (in milliseconds, up to
250 maximum) capabilities for a delay buffer.
Usage: The jitter delay parameter reduces audible audio noise. Prevents audio
from sounding choppy. Only necessary on packet IP networks.
Dependencies: PBXgateway only. The more Jitter Delay, the more tolerant for
jitter in the network, but voice is actually delayed.
Recommendations: Start setting at 20-30 msec.
See Also: Setting Voice Parameters on page 63
Logout
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Main menu
Description: This parameter will end the current MI session; either Telnet or VT100.
Logout
Code
Parameter Location:
Remote->Configuration->Port
Description: A code sent by the Gateway to the PBX. This code is used to log
ACD agents out of the ACD queue in the event of an abnormal disconnect. This
prevents ACD agents from receiving a call during a network outage.
Dependencies: Avaya protocol remote units only.
See Also: Extender 6000 Quick Installation Guide
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
134
Method
(Voice)
Parameter Location:
Gateway ->Configuration->Default->Port->
Description: Select voice compression method. Voice is compressed to reduce
bandwidth requirements.
Usage: Provides the system administrator with the ability to change the
compression method on a port-by-port basis.
Example: G.729A
Dependencies: PBXgateway only. The network must provide adequate
bandwidth.
See Also:
Chapter 4: The Management Interface
Voice Quality Expectations on page 161.
Appendix B: Bandwidth Requirements
Mode
(WAN)
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->WAN 1 or WAN 2
Description: Selects the WAN port connection type.
Usage: The WAN port of the PBXgateway connects the unit to the network
device (i.e. CSU/DSU). The mode or interface type selects the protocol used by
the unit.
RS-232, RS-530, and V.35 for Synchronous connections
Dependencies: The mode must match the interface type of the network device.
See Also: Chapter 4 Setting the Mode on page 70.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
135
MSB Key
Parameter Location:
Remote>Configuration->Port
Description: The MSB (Make Set Busy) key sends a code from the Gateway to
the PBX. This code is used to log agents out of the ACD queue in the event of
an abnormal disconnect. This prevents ACD agents from receiving calls during
a network outage.
Dependencies: Meridian Only.
Optimize
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Utilities->File>
Description: This parameter will optimize the internal flash file system.
Usage: Used for advanced troubleshooting. Often used to prepare file system
for upgrade.
IMPORTANT: Do not use on an active system
Packet Size
Parameter Location:
Gateway ->Configuration->Port->Default->Voice
Description: A packet is a generic term for a bundle of data, usually in binary
form, which includes the data itself and certain control information. The packets
are sent via HDLC over a synchronous-serial connection or via IP over Ethernet.
The size of the voice packet can increase voice quality while reducing bandwidth
needs. A bigger packet size contains less overhead, but will increase the delay
in sending the packets.
Usage: PBXgateway only. This parameter selects the number of voice frames or
windows to be included in a single RVP voice packet.
Recommendation: 2 (may need to increase to 4 for some packet networks such
as IP)
See Also: Page 63, Setting Voice Parameters.
Packet
Trace
Parameter Location:
Gateway ->Configuration->Port->Ports_x-y ->Port_x->Voice
Description: Enable/Disable detection of lost voice packets
Usage: If a problem with voice is suspected, enable this feature to allow viewing
sent voice packets over the connection.
Dependencies: Enabling this feature will add overhead to the system and may
affect voice quality. Only used for debugging.
See Also: Page 63, Setting Voice Parameters.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
136
Password
(Connect)
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->Port
Description: A connect password provides a secure link between the
PBXgateway and Remote Unit.
Usage: If assigned, the connect password must be entered for communication
between the PBXgateway and a Remote unit.
Example: 427stamp
Dependencies: The connect passwords for both units must match.
See Also: Chapter 3, page 67.
Path
(Voice)
Parameter Location:
Gateway ->Configuration->Port->Default->Voice
Description: Dynamic/Constant voice path following off-hook/on-hook.
Dynamic means that the Branch Office unit uses the available bandwidth when
the remote user goes off-hook.
Constant means that the voice path is always reserved.
Usage: Used for applications that are “oversubscribed” allowing the maximum
use of available bandwidth. If bandwidth is not available to a user and dynamic
voice path is enabled, they hear a “fast busy” and the call will be blocked.
For example, using dynamic would allow all 8 phones to connect on a 128 k
connection, but not all phones could go offhook at the same time. Using constant
would not allow all the phones to connect, but the connected phones would all
be able to go off-hook at the same time.
Dependencies: PBXgateway only.
Recommendations: Constant. Although for Async configurations we
recommend Dynamic.
See Also: Page 63, Setting Voice Parameters.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
137
Port
Matching
Parameter Location:
Gateway ->Configuration->Connect->Port Matching
Description: Port 1 on the Gateway will connect to Port 1 on the Remote,
unless User IDs have been assigned to the ports. In a 2:1 config, using
RVP_Direct, the Gateway Port Offset is used to determine what Remote is
calling. Using RVP_Over_IP, the User ID field is used.
Usage: For 2:1 configs, when you want one remote to have dedicated port to
port matching and the 2nd remote to connect on a first come first serve basis. It
ensures that the users on remote #1 will always have a port available.
Dependencies: PBXgateway only. User IDs (RVP_Over_IP) override Port
Matching.
Primary
Interface
Parameter Location:
Remote>Configuration>Connect->RVP_Direct
Description: This parameter tells the PBXgateway which Serial WAN port it
should try to use in order to bring up phone connections and voice paths. Your
Primary Connection port must coincide with the WAN port that is enabled and
connected to an appropriate network device. In other words, if you select WAN
1 you must have WAN 1 enabled and connected to a network device.
Available Options:
WAN 1
WAN 2
Dependencies: The WAN port corresponding to this connection parameter must
be enabled and connected to appropriate network equipment.
See also: Secondary Interface on page 140.
Priority
(Log)
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->Log
Description: Selects log message priority
Usage: Used to determine which messages are logged. The log message
priority is used to customize the level of troubleshooting desired. This info
applies to:Sys, Mgmt, NET and Port priority parameters as well.
Log messages include:
Fatal: Unit is not functioning
Error: Failure
Warning: Problem with unit, still operational
Info: EXTender session, someone connected
Debug: Detailed message (for troubleshooting)
Trace: Packet type tracing
Example: If the (Log) Priority was set to “Info”, then the only log messages that
would NOT be saved are messages related to “Debug” and “Trace”.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
138
Priority
(Syslog)
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->IP->More->Syslog
Description: Selects log message priority to Syslog host.
Usage: Used to determine which messages are logged. The Syslog message
priority is used to customize the level of troubleshooting desired.
Log messages include:
Fatal: Unit is not functioning
Error: Failure
Warning: Problem with unit, still operational
Info: EXTender session, someone connected
Debug: Detailed message (for troubleshooting)
Trace: Packet type tracing
Example: If the (Syslog) Priority was set to “Info”, then the only log messages
that would NOT be saved are messages related to “Debug” and “Trace”.
Reset Stats
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway->Utilities->System
Description: Resets the WAN stats and Connect stats.
Usage: Used to clean up the statistics and to help pinpoint problems associated
with the unit.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
139
Secondary
Interface
Parameter Location:
Remote ->Configuration->Connect->RVP_Direct
Description: This parameter tells the PBXgateway which Serial WAN port it
should try to use if the Primary Interface fails or runs out of bandwidth. The
Secondary Interface is used as a backup or network overflow of the Primary
Interface. If you do not have both WAN ports enabled, you do not need a
Secondary Interface.
Available Options:
None
WAN_1
WAN_2
Dependencies: The WAN port corresponding to this connection parameter must
be enabled and connected to appropriate network equipment.
See also: Primary Interface on page 138.
Size (Log)
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway->Configuration->Log
Description: The size of the log message in bytes.
Note: After the log is full, the log messages are written over each other, starting
from the first message.
Usage: Limits the size of Log messages. Value ranges 4096 to 131072.
Example: [ 409131072 ]
Set
Password
(Admin)
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway->Utilities->System
Description: This parameter sets the admin password for the
PBXgateway/Remote. This is NOT the Connect Password.
Usage: The admin password will restrict access to the Management Interface
(MI).
Example: doc345
See Also: Chapter 3 page 86.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
140
Subnet
Mask
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->IP->Address
Description: Enter Subnet Mask IP Address
Usage: A Subnet Mask identifies the network number (class) and the range of
valid machine addresses on the network.
Example: 255.255.255.0
Dependencies: Must be assigned by the network administrator
See Also: Chapter 3 page 76.
Sync Setup
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->WAN1 or WAN2
Description: Enter data rate of device connected to the WAN port of the
EXTender unit.
Usage: Matches the synchronize data transfer rate of the Gateway and Remote
units connected to the network device (CSU/DSU).
Example: 384,000
Dependencies: Sync rate of the EXTender units must match the CSU/DSU
device
See Also: Chapter page 71.
SysContact
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->IP->SNMP
Description: Used for SNMP. The name, phone number, etc. of the individual
to contact with errors or questions about the EXTender.
Usage: Used for reference purposes.
Example: Ralph Jones
Dependencies: SNMP must be enabled.
See Also: Page 235.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
141
SysLocation
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->IP->SNMP
Description: Used for SNMP. The location of the EXTender.
Example: Boston, MA
Dependencies: SNMP must be enabled.
See Also: Page 235.
Telnet
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->IP
Description: Enable/Disable Telnet Access
Usage: Enabling this parameter provides Telnet access to the PBXgateway
through a PC connected to an IP network.
Dependencies: The IP Address must be assigned by the network administrator.
See Also: Chapter 3 page 76.
Trap Host
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration>IP->SNMP
Description: Used for SNMP. This menu allows the user to input one to eight IP
addresses of nodes or devices (PCs) to which to send SNMP Traps. These
nodes should be capable of running some sort of Network Management software
(HP Openview®) that is compatible with the SNMPv2c standard. Only these
devices will be targeted for Traps. The EXTender does not broadcast Trap
packets over the network.
Usage: Used to Set up SNMP.
Dependencies: SNMP must be enabled.
See Also: See page 235.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
142
Parameter Location:
Trap Path
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->IP->SNMP
Description: Used for SNMP. This variable determines the path the EXTender
should use to send Traps to the Trap Hosts entered above. The choices are
[LAN | WAN | BOTH].
If this variable is set to LAN then the SNMP agent will attempt to send Trap
packets out via a wire connection such as Ethernet. If such a connection does
not exist then the packet is dropped.
Setting the variable to WAN will cause the SNMP agent to attempt to send Trap
packets via the proprietary WAN connection. This is necessary if the Remote is
not directly connected to the Net and is being serviced via the proxy SNMP
server on the Gateway. If such a connection fails, then the packet is dropped.
Setting the variable to BOTH will cause the SNMP agent to send the Trap packet
via both the LAN and WAN connections. If both paths are valid this will produce
duplicate Trap messages on the Trap Hosts.
Dependencies: SNMP must be enabled.
See Also: Page 235 for more information.
Trap
Priority
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->IP->SNMP
Description: This variable sets the minimum priority of log messages to be sent
as Traps. It has the possible values of:
Warning
Info
Error
Fatal
Notes:
Setting the value to Warning will allow Traps of priority Warning and above.
Setting the value to Error will also allow Traps of priority Fatal, but will exclude
Warning and Info.
Usage: This variable is useful for controlling the amount and type of Traps being
sent to network managers.
Dependencies: SNMP must be enabled.
See Also: See page 235 for more information.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
143
User ID
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->Port->Port_x
Description: The User ID is a numeric value assigned to the phone port.
Usage: The system administrator assigns a User ID for identification purposes
and security. It also determines which PBXgateway port a remote connects to.
Dependencies: Must be entered for access to the phone port.
See Also: Chapter 3 page 68.
Utilization
Parameter Location:
Remote>Configuration->Connect->RVP_Direct
Description: This parameter allows the system administrator to oversubscribe
the network link. It is the amount of total required bandwidth to actually reserve
for each phone. This parameter would remain at the default setting of 100 for the
majority of installations.
Example: Need 128K of bandwidth but only have 115 K available.
Required bandwidth =
Available bandwidth
115k =
128k
90%
A value of “90” would be entered under Utilization.
Dependencies: Remote unit only.
Web Server
Parameter Location:
Remote/Gateway ->Configuration->IP
Description: This parameter enables you to configure the PBXgateway &
Branch Office units via a Web server, as opposed to a Telnet or direct
connection.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
144
This page intentionally left blank.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
145
Chapter 5: Troubleshooting
This Chapter provides information to locate, isolate, and correct operational errors, communication errors,
and functional problems with the PBXgateway, Branch Office, and EXTender 4000 units.
This Chapter is divided into six principal areas for troubleshooting:
•
Baseline Checklist
•
Status LEDs
•
Troubleshooting Procedure
•
Voice Issues
•
Status Menus
•
Remote Phone Messages
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
146
Baseline Checklist The baseline checklist is a list of simple checks used as a starting point for
troubleshooting the devices. It covers basic installation requirements,
wiring info and network information.
Status LEDs
Single and tri-color LEDs, located on the front and back panels of each
unit. The LEDs blink in specific sequences indicating the unit status during
Power-Up as well as providing status information on the System, WAN
Port and Ethernet (LAN) connections, during normal operations.
Troubleshooting
Procedures
Voice Quality
Expectations
A set of procedures providing step-by-step instructions to identify and
rectify problems.
Information on common issues associated with voice compression.
Status Menus
Diagnostic menus providing statistical information on all 8 or 12 phone
ports, both WAN ports, Connect stats, Log and IP stats and general
System information.
Remote Phone
Messages
A chart listing error messages that are displayed on the Remote phones
(connected to the Remote unit).
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
147
Baseline Checklist
The Baseline Checklist is a logical list of items that are associated with an active and operational
installation. These items should be checked-off BEFORE you attempt to troubleshoot either the
Gateway or Remote unit.
Note: If any of the items are NOT true as stated, they should be corrected as detailed herein,
and then continue with the remaining items for both units to verify a complete installation.
Network Checklist
Verify that the existing network is capable of transmitting and receiving data packets.
Verify the correct cable is used to connect the unit to the network device.
Synchronous Serial/RVP_Direct
Check that the sync rate of the network device matches the sync rate setting for both the PBXgateway
and Branch unit.
(see page 71 for setting the Sync Rate)
Make sure the sync mode of the Gateway and Branch units match the network device signaling type
(V.35, RS-530, RS-232).
(see page 71 for setting the Sync Mode )
IP/RVP_IP
Check that the IP address information (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Router) for the PBXgateway,
Branch unit and EXTender 4000 is set correctly. (see page 76 for setting IP Parameters)
PBXgateway Unit Checklist
Verify that the unit is plugged into an active AC outlet.
Verify that the RJ-21 cable between the unit and the PBX or punch-down block is secure.
Verify that the DB-25 cables are secure between the units and network devices. (Synchronous-serial
connection only)
Verify that the Ethernet cable is connected and that there is an active link status on the Gateway and
Network Hub (IP Connections).
Branch Office Unit Checklist
Verify that the unit is plugged into an active AC outlet.
Verify that the RJ-21 cable between the Branch Unit and the break-out box or punch-down block is
secure.
Verify that the DB-25 cables are secure between the unit and network devices. (RVP_Direct connection
only)
Verify that the Ethernet cable is connected and there is an active link status on the Branch and Network
Hub.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
148
EXTender 4000 Unit Checklist
Verify that the power supply is plugged into an active AC outlet and the power cable is plugged into the
unit.
Verify that the Ethernet cable is connected and there is an active link status on the EXTender 4000 and
Network Hub.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
149
Status LEDs
PBXgateway and Branch Office EXTender
When the units are powered-up, a series of self-diagnostic tests are performed and displayed
as a series of LED blinks. The following chart lists the different status sequences.
For information on the ……
See page
Power-Up Sequence
151
System Status LEDs
153
Port Status LEDs
154
Ethernet/LAN Status LEDs
154
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
150
Power Up Sequence
The following steps are performed automatically when the PBXgateway and Branch Office units are
powered-up.
DRAM Tests – Checks the internal DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) chips.
Selftest –
Diagnostic routine to verify operation of various hardware components of the unit.
ROM Countdown –
A series of LED blinks that display the process of loading the Runtime image.
Runtime Image –
This is the software executable file.
WAN
PWR 1
Port Status
2
3 Reset
1 2
3
4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 79: PBXgateway Power up Test
Note: The EXTender 4000 utilizes only one LED, labeled “Status” to display results of all four tests. (see
page 155 for more information)
Step #1 DRAM Tests
When the unit is powered up it runs four DRAM tests. The Power LED flashes green while these run. If
you look closely the Power LED flashes at slightly different speeds as the different tests run. If the tests
pass then the Power LED goes solid green. If any of the tests fail then all four status LEDs go solid red
and the EXTender halts. (Refer to the System Status LED chart on page 153 for more information)
Note: The DRAM tests are only run when the unit is powered on, rebooting the device without power
cycling it will jump right into the selftest diagnostics.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
151
Step # 2 Selftest
After the DRAM tests a set of selftest diagnostics run. The selftest diagnostics only affect the LEDs if
there is a failure. On failure, the Power LED changes from solid green to solid yellow (and remains that
way as long as the unit is powered on, or the selftests are run again and pass). The Power LED will
remain “Yellow” (indicating a failure) instead of “Green”.
Additionally, the first four Port Status LEDs are temporarily lit with a code indicating the last selftest
failure. The pattern is a binary number indicating the kind of failure. Table 15, shown below, provides
information on the port failure patterns including a short description and required action.
Note: If there are multiple failures you will only see the pattern for the last failure. (refer to the System
Status LED chart, on page 153, for more information)
Power
LED
Port LE
Yellow
1
ON
2
OFF
3
OFF
4
OFF
Yellow
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Yellow
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Yellow
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Yellow
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Table 15:
Description
Action
RTC failure (error
code 0x8)
DSP failure (error
code 0x9)
Hardware FaultPower cycle the units
If self-test fails repetitively, contact
customer service.
I2C failure (error
code 0xA)
Ethernet failure
(error code 0xB)
PLD failure (error
code 0xC)
Failure Patterns
Step #3 ROM Countdown
After the diagnostics run the ROM goes through a short countdown on the console. During this time the
WAN1 LED flickers green. The WAN1 LED goes solid green and the WAN2 LED ‘flickers’ green while the
runtime image is being loaded into memory. WAN2 goes solid green when the runtime image is
successfully loaded into memory. Control is then passed to the runtime image (see Step #4).
Step #4 Runtime Image
The runtime image first turns all system status and Port Status LEDs off, except for the Power LED (which
is solid green if there are no self-test failures or solid yellow if there are self-test failures).
During initialization the runtime image flickers Port Status LED1 while it’s downloading the Programmable
Logic Device (PLD), and then makes Port LED1 solid once the PLD download is complete. Similar
flickering and solid LED patterns are used when downloading each Digital Signal Processor (DSP), where
Port LED2 is the signaling DSP, and Port LED3-LED8 are the voice DSPs. So when the runtime image is
starting up you see each Port LED 1 through 8 successively flicker and go solid until all eight are solid.
After the PLD and DSP downloads are complete the Port LEDs drop into their normal operating patterns.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
152
System Status LEDs
The PBXgateway and Branch Office units have four tri-color LEDs – (RED, Yellow, and
Green) indicating the unit status once the runtime image is operating and the status condition
of the WAN ports has been determined.
IMPORTANT: Refer to page 156 for troubleshooting the units using the System Status LEDs.
LED States
LED LABEL
Off
PWR
Off
WAN1
Solid Red
Solid
Yellow
Flashing
Yellow
Solid
Green
Slow
Green
Flash
Fast
Green
Flash
Self-test
Diagnostic
Error
DCE
Ready
-
Has
power
-
-
Not
enabled
DRAM
Test
failed
No Device
connected
DCE
Ready
Carrier
Up
Remote
Up
Remote
test
WAN2
Not
enabled
No Device
connected
DCE
Ready
-
Carrier
Up
Remote
Up
Remote
test
WAN3
Not
enabled
No Device
connected
DCE
Ready
Carrier
UP
In Use
Remote
test
*Analog
-
-
Card
detected
and
Onhook
Onhook
on
analog
call.
-
-
Ringing
* Applies to EXTender 6000 equipped with an Analog Port only.
Table 16:
WAN and Power Status LEDs
DRAM Test Failed: This indicates that one or all of the four DRAM tests have failed. This hardware
failure condition can be caused by a faulty internal DRAM chip. Recycle the power on the unit and contact
MCK if the light remains “Red”.
Selftest Diagnostic Error: This indicates that there is a problem with a selftest, indicating a possible
hardware problem. Recycle the power on the unit and contact Customer Support if the light remains
“Yellow”.
Not Enabled: Enable the WAN port, if the WAN port is needed.
No Device Connected:
Check the wiring and cable pinouts between both units and the network device. (see page 37 for pinout
information)
Check the cable.
DCE Ready: Device connected but no network link to the alternate site. Possibly a network error between
devices. Check all cables and power to the units.
Carrier Up: Network link established. Try to establish phone connection from the Remote unit.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
153
Remote Up: Phone at the remote site is online.
Remote test: This test sends packets to the alternate site to check the network condition. (see page 158
for more info)
Port Status LEDs
The PBXgateway and Branch Office units each have eight or twelve LEDs indicating the status
of the twelve user phones (Branch unit) or PBX/KSU ports (PBXgateway).
IMPORTANT: Refer to page 157 for troubleshooting the unit using the Port Status LEDs.
Off
Solid Green
Slow Green Flash
Fast Green
Flash
Green Flicker
Port is
disabled
Port is enabled,
but not extended
Extended, and user
is on-hook (phone is
not in use).
Extended and the user
is off-hook. (phone is in
use)
Port is enabled,
there is a bad connection
to the PBX or phones.
Table 17:
Port Status LEDs
Enable the Phone port as follows:
Connect the Gateway or Branch unit to the Management Interface (MI).
Navigate to the Port menu using the following path:
->Configuration->Port
Check the “Enabled” field indicates “YES” or if the field is set to
<Default>, check that the default setting has all ports enabled.
Check the following:
Check that the correct module is installed at the location. (Gateway unit installed at the
corporate facility, and a Remote unit at the Branch office)
Check the wiring to the punch-down block.
Check for a loose connection on the back of the units.
Check for a damaged RJ-21cable.
If you are sure everything is correct, you may have a bad telephony port on the EXTender or
PBX.
Note: The most common cause of this problem is faulty wiring. You should double-check all
wiring.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
154
EXTender 4000
Once the EXTender™ 4000 is properly connected it will begin a series of self-diagnostic tests that are
displayed as a series of LED flashes. The “Status” LED will blink for several seconds as the module is
initializing.
Once the power-up sequence has finished, (see page 151) the state of the LEDs should be:
Figure 80: Front Panel
Label
Status
CLN
PC
LAN
EXT
Table 18:
Description
Blinking while module is initializing..
Off when not powered.
After unit is powered:
On Solid Green when enabled but not extended.
Slow Green Flash when extended and on-hook.
Fast Green Flash when extended and off hook.
Green Flicker when there is no connection to a telephone.
Blinking when an ethernet collision condition exists.
Off if nothing plugged in or connection is bad.
On solid when a good connection is established.
Blinks when traffic is sent.
Off if nothing plugged in or connection is bad.
On solid when a good connection is established.
Blinks when traffic is sent.
Normally off, blinks when the EXTender™ 4000 sends ethernet traffic.
EXTender 4000 LED States
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
155
Troubleshooting Procedure
PBXgateway & Branch Office units
The following procedure provides a step-by-step process for identifying and rectifying problems with the
PBXgateway and Branch Office units. Each step is a question requiring a “Yes” or “No” response. Each
response has a series of checks or actions necessary to correct the problem.
Prerequisites:
Both units must be powered-up with some LED blinking patterns visible.
Both units must be connected to an active network capable of sending and receiving packets.
System Status LEDs
After the units have gone through the self-diagnostics tests (see page 151) the PWR LED should light
solid Green.
Is the PWR LED lit “Green” on each unit?
No
If the PWR LED is lit “Yellow” this indicates a self-diagnostic problem with the unit.
(Refer to page 153 for more information)
If the PWR LED is lit “RED” this indicates the DRAM test has failed. (Refer to page 153 for more
information)
Yes
The active WAN port (WAN 1 or WAN 2) that is connected to the network device should be lit solid
“Green”. This indicates that the carrier or network link is established.
Note: If the LED is a slow “Green” flash, this indicates that a phone at the remote site is online. A fast
“Green” flash indicates that the Remote is in a test mode.
Go to next page
Is the active WAN port LED lit solid “Green”?
No
If the LED is lit “Yellow”, this means that the network device is connected, but there is no network link to
the alternate site. (Refer to page 153 for more information)
If the LED is lit “RED” there is no network device connected to the unit. (Refer to page 153 for more
information)
If the LED is OFF, this means that the WAN port is not enabled. (Refer to page 153 for more information)
Yes
Continue with Port Status LEDs on the next page
Note: If you are using your Gateway and Branch in RVP_IP mode, you do not need your WAN port
enabled.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
156
Port Status LEDs
After the units have gone through the self-diagnostics tests (see page 151) and loading the runtime
image, all eight or twelve phone port LEDs should light solid “Green”. This indicates that the phone port is
connected to a digital port on the PBX and to a phone connected to the Remote, but not extended.
Are the Port LEDs (labeled 1 through 8 or 12) lit solid “Green” ?
No
If the Port LED is OFF this indicates the port is disabled. All phone ports are enabled by default.
(Refer to page 154 for more information)
If the port LED blinks with a green flicker this indicates that the port is enabled but there is a bad
connection to the PBX or phones. (Refer to page 154 for more information)
Yes
Ports are ready. Press ‘1’ to connect. (If Auto-connect is enabled, it is not necessary to press ‘1’.) As each
remote phone is connected the LED will begin to flash slowly. This means that the phone is enabled but
still not in use (on-hook).
Does the port LED blink with a slow, green flash?
No
Check the log messages within the MI for obvious Port errors.
(see Appendix E Log Messages for more info)
If using WAN connectivity, test the WAN connection. (Refer to page 158 for more information)
Are there any messages displayed on the Remote phones?
No
Place a call using a phone connected to the Remote unit. As each remote user places a call the LED will
begin to flash faster. This means that the phone is extended and in use (off-hook) by the remote user.
Yes
Refer to page 171, for a detailed list of Remote Phone Messages.
Check that the phone is plugged into the breakout box or equivalent.
Check the line cord from the phone to the box.
Can you place a call? (The port LED should blink with a fast, green flash)
No
Check the wiring to the PBX. (see the page 37, for pinout information)
Is the Voice Quality acceptable?
No
Go to “Voice Quality Expectations” on page 161.
Yes
Everything is Ok
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
157
Test the WAN Connection
If all of your Port and WAN LEDs indicate the units are installed properly, but you still cannot connect the
remote phones, you should test the WAN connection.
Note: This is only applicable for connecting over a synchronous-serial network (RVP_Direct).
Test the WAN connection as follows;
IMPORTANT: This test will not run if any phones are off-hook.
Access the Management Interface (MI) on the Switch or Remote unit.
Reset the WAN Port.
Navigate to the Diagnostics menu using the following path:
Utilities->Diagnostics->Test WAN
Select the proper WAN Port and using the Default values, select “Begin test”. This test will send voice
packets to the offsite unit and will count the packets as they are sent back.
The MI will run the test and, upon its completion a “Test Results window” appears.
Figure 81: Test Results Window
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
158
The test results are shown below;
If the items circled register any values
the problem is firmware related. Powercycle the unit to clear the values and
retest.
If any of the circled items (shown with a “0”
value) display any values, there is a problem
with the network. The network device may be
in a loop-back, which means the packets are
sent to the device at the remote site, but the
packets are not received by the Remote unit.
Verify the network devices are working
properly.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
159
Test the IP Connection
If all of your Status LEDs indicate the units are installed properly, but you still cannot connect the remote
phone, you should test the IP connection.
Note: This is only applicable for connecting over a synchronous-serial network (RVP_IP).
Test the IP connection as follows;
IMPORTANT: This test will not run if the phone is off-hook.
Access the Management Interface (MI) from the unit.
Reset the IP Port.
Navigate to the Diagnostics menu using the following path:
Utilities->Diagnostics->Test IP
Using the Default values, select “Begin test”. This test will send voice packets to the offsite unit and will
count the packets as they are sent back.
The MI will run the test and, upon its completion a “Test Results window” appears.
Figure 82: Test Results Window
From a PC on the remote network make sure that you can reliably ping the PBXgateway.
From a PC on the corporate network, make sure you can ping the EXTender 6000 and 4000 on the
remote network.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
160
Voice Quality Expectations
EXTenders use industry-standard voice compression methods to allow multiple users to connect using
less bandwidth. While the voice quality should remain excellent in all circumstances, you may notice
some minor affects depending on the voice compression selected. The person you are talking to on the
other end should not notice these affects in most instances.
The G.729A algorithm only uses 8Kbps for its audio path (plus overhead). It therefore dramatically
reduces the amount of network bandwidth required to extend multiple phones. It also provides excellent
voice quality to all parties involved in a conversation. However, this algorithm is designed to optimize
audio in the frequency range of the human voice. Tones outside of that range may sound muffled. Also,
listening to audio that has already been compressed may sound slightly less clear. Here are some of the
affects you may notice with compressed audio:
Hold music ay sound less clear.
Dial Tone, DTMF Tones, and phone Rings may sound garbled particularly on speakerphone. They still
should function properly 100% of the time.
May experience some minor echo and reduced audio clarity when calling some Cell phones. They often
already compress audio.
May hear some echo and notice minor delay in the conversation if calling internationally. This is caused
by the delay in providing compressed audio and the fact that calling internationally may already introduce
some delay.
If you are experiencing any of these problems and feel that it is not presenting you with adequate voice
quality, we recommend using the ADPCM 32 voice compression method. While it requires more network
bandwidth, it uses less voice compression and therefore minimizes the chances that any of these affects
ever occur.
It is important to know the following.
The type of audio problem
Example: Echo (see next page) , broken or choppy audio, lost calls, etc.
When does the problem occur?
All calls
Internal calls only
External calls only
Intermittently some external calls
Do all users experience the problem?
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
161
Echo Problems
Understanding and Correcting Echo Problems
The PBXgateway and both EXTender 6000 and 4000 employ the industry standard G.165 echo canceller
with some proprietary MCK improvements to help eliminate or reduce echo even further. However, it is
not possible to cancel all instances of echo 100% of the time. It should be noted that echo perceived by
extended PBX users, will not be perceived by the party on the other end of the call.
EXTender’s Impact on Echo
Because EXTenders deal exclusively with digital audio on the line side of a PBX, they cannot cause any
echo. However, if you experience any echo from your connection to the PSTN (Public Switched
Telephony Network), the EXTender application could make it noticeable because of increased delay in
the audio path. For example, if echo occurs on a line after only a few milliseconds, your ear cannot
detect the echo. However, if the echo occurs after 100, 50, or even 20 milliseconds, your ear will likely
detect the problem. The G.165 echo canceller can cancel echo up to certain limitations. If you have a
noticeable echo problem, you should look into the following:
If you experience echo on all external calls, you probably have a problem with your PSTN trunk lines.
Most likely they are analog, and those analog lines are generating a great deal of echo when interfacing
with your PBX. Non-extended PBX phones may not perceive the echo, due to the fact that echo without
delay, does not sound like echo.
Cause: The most common cause of consistent echo on all external calls, are analog trunk lines that are
out of specification, or a problem with the termination within the PBX. Most commonly there is an
impedance mismatch between the analog line and your PBX. Also, the db level of the analog circuit may
be too high. Analog circuits that are “hot” are a common cause of echo. Again, that echo may not be
perceived on non-extended phones, but that is only because there is no delay.
Possible Solution: If you have analog lines, you should consult your local phone company and ask for
the exact specifications of that line. They may need to go onsite to measure the characteristics of your
analog circuits.
If you only experience echo occasionally on external calls, your system is probably fine. The echo
probably only occurs when calling to or receiving calls from a party that is using a) analog lines, b) a cell
phone, or c) analog trunks on their phone system. In this case there is little you can do. The echo
canceller included with the EXTenders usually will cancel this echo after a second or two, but
occasionally the echo goes beyond its capabilities. However, it should be noted that the party on the
other end of the call will not experience this echo.
If you experience a slight echo on all external calls, but it goes away after a second or two, that is normal
with analog trunk lines. If you have analog trunks into your PBX, the echo canceller frequently takes a
second or two to detect levels of what is echo and what is voice. Then it starts to cancel the echo. The
only way to improve that situation is to replace your analog trunks with digital trunk lines.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
162
Management Interface (MI) Status Menus
RVP_DIRECT Menus
Port Status
Look for:
Significant “NC” values on any phone port. This value indicates that the port is enabled but there is a bad
connection between the Remote unit and the phone or the PBXgateway and the PBX.
Figure 83: Port Stats
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
163
WAN Stats
Look for:
Any “Framing Errors”, “Parity Errors”, “CRC Errors”, “Overruns”, “DCD Lost”, “CTS Lost” or any “Busy”
type errors. Significant values indicate WAN device problems.
Figure 84: WAN Stats
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
164
WAN Bandwidth
Look for:
Any “Clipped ” (Kbps) count. This indicates packets that were not sent as there may not have been
enough bandwidth. If this value exceeds the actual Bandwidth that you have assigned in the WAN menu,
you may need to increase the WAN Bandwidth.
Figure 85: WAN Bandwidth
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
165
Connect Info
Look for:
A “Current State -> extended” value of “No”. This indicates that the remote phone is not extended, or may
not be connected.
Significant “Lost Signal” values on any phone port. This value indicates that the port has not completed
phone connections.
V42 “resync” errors indicates that the network device may have reset itself due to significant network
errors.
Figure 86: Connect Info
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
166
Connect Stats
Look for:
•
A high number of "Connect tries". This indicates the remote is trying to connect to the
PBXgateway. If this value is high (maybe above 20), there could be a WAN problem.
•
A high number of "Disconnect->carrier lost". This directly relates to WAN outages. The WAN
devices may be intermittent.
•
Any "Disconnect by port offline" values. This indicates the remote port has been disconnected possibly a wiring problem.
•
Any "Disconnect by port in use" values. Indicates the remote is connecting to a port that is already
being used. There may be a configuration problem, or the port itself has a problem.
•
Any "Disconnect by no voice" values. The voice path has been lost. This could be related to a port
problem or even a wiring problem.
•
Significant amount of "Disconnect by bad password" values. If this value is high (maybe more than
20), an unauthorized user may be attempting to connect from the remote phone.
•
Significant “Blocked call” values on any phone port. This value indicates that the unit has been
oversubscribed, indicating that because of bandwidth limitations, some of the phone calls must be
“Blocked” or stopped from making a connection if there is no bandwidth available.
•
“Lost signal” values on any port indicate that the unit has phone connection problems. Check all
wiring.
Figure 87: Connect Stats
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
167
RVP_IP Menus
IP Active
Make sure correct information is shown. If this is not correct, go to the "Configuration->IP->Address"
menu, and enter the correct info. A large number of collisions could indicate network traffic problems.
Figure 88: IP Info
IP Rx Stats
Look for:
Any value, that increments other than "total", and "cantforward".
Figure 89: IP RX Stats
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
168
IP ARP
Make sure you can see your "Default gateway" in this table; especially if your Branch Office unit is on a
remote LAN.
Figure 90: IP ARP
IP Routes
The path (IP) to the PBXgateway should be shown in this table.
Figure 91: IP Routes
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
169
General System Info
Figure 92: System Info
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
170
Remote Phone Messages
The following messages appear on the remote telephone display connected to the Branch Office
or EXTender 4000 remote units when a connection attempt fails. The telephone shows ‘Connect
Error,’ followed by a message. Table 19 and 20 contains the possible Connect Error messages.
Message
Already connected
Assigned port Busy
(see note)
Description
Remote port is already connected.
The switch port is being used by
another user.
Assigned port Down
(see note)
The switch port is not available,
due to problems (green flicker) with
the port.
Displayed if the network connection
to the PBX is lost.
Carrier Lost
(see note)
Connect rejected
The PBX/KSU rejects the
connection request.
Connect Timeout
Remote cannot connect to
PBXgateway.
The network device is not
connected, being used, or is not
active.
The network device has a problem.
The network device is being used
by another device.
The network device is not ready for
use. (yellow LED)
The unit bandwidth is
oversubscribed. No network
bandwidth is available from phone
signaling.
Network disabled
Network down
Network in use
Network not ready
No bandwidth
Table 19:
Action
Reset port at PBXgateway.
Wait until port is available or reset
port on Gateway and try to reconnect.
Check port connection at
PBXgateway.
Check network links.
Attempt to reconnect after
network is up and running.
Possible connect password is
incorrect.
Check network links.
Attempt to reconnect.
Check WAN connection on
PBXgateway unit.
Check network link and device.
Check network link and device.
Reset WAN and try to re-connect.
Make sure primary connect
matches “enabled” WAN port.
Check synch rate or change voice
compression.
Connect Error Messages
Note: These messages are not preceded by “Connect Error”.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
171
Chapter 6: File Management and System Upgrades
This chapter contains information and instruction on upgrading your EXTender and PBXgateway.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
172
Introduction
The PBXgateway and Remote units contain a flash file system to retain basic
configuration files, the actual firmware, and the instructions necessary for starting
the units. The flash memory system does not require continuous power to retain its
memory.
Flash memory file system has the following properties:
•
Contains the operating software known as firmware. This firmware is
upgradable.
•
Non-volatile storage, so it retains all saved information even when the power
to your EXTender is turned off.
•
Stored EXTender configuration files, containing specific set up parameters.
These files are unit specific and include an appropriate unit extension (.swt for
Switch or Gateway files and .rem for Remote files)
•
Stores any other files that have been copied to the unit.
The EXTender Flash File system can be written to for copying files or updating
Access to the
firmware. Access to flash file system is done through various connections using a
Flash File Syste
PC. Example: Direct serial connection, FTP etc.
Note: FTP must be enabled (see page 78). Access to the Flash file system can be
secured by setting up an administrator’s password (See page 86), used by the
system administrator.
Firmware
All firmware images stored in the Flash file system are saved with the following
extensions:
•
Config Files
EXTender 6000 & PBXgateway: .m6b
• EXTender 4000: .mlb
Note: All .m6b and .mpb files are binary files.
Boot.cfg
EXTender configuration parameters are contained within the Flash file system
under a .rem (Remote) or .swt (Switch) file extension. All changes made to items
pertaining to the configuration of the units MUST be saved to Flash file system
before they become active.
Call Back Files
IMPORTANT: The Management Interface (MI) will prompt you when changes
must be saved.
This is unit specific information required to startup or “boot” both the Switch and
Remote units.
Boot information includes:
•
IP Address information
•
the active config file to be loaded
• the firmware (.m6B or .mpb) file to boot with.
The PBXgateway unit saves .cbk files to enable it to contact remote users that are
currently disconnected.
Note: This file is used specifically for Remote Login capabilities. See page 105 for
more information.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
173
Configuration File Management
Changing the Active Config file
Introduction
When the PBXgateway is powered-up, the Flash file system loads a
configuration file (called the “active” .rem (Remote) or .swt (Switch) file) which
contains all the parameters necessary for operation. The system administrator
can change this “active” .rem (Remote) or .swt (Switch) file so that a different
set of parameters loads.
Note: The default configuration file shipped with the units is runtime.rem or
runtime.swt.
Procedure
Access the Config Menu using the following path:
Path: Utilities->Upgrade->Config File
Select an existing .rem (Remote) or .swt (Switch) file from the list displayed.
The display reads;
Change Configuration file to……
Enter (Y) or (N).
The unit will then prompt you to reboot. This change requires a reboot in order
to take affect.
All changes made to the Switch or Remote parameters will be saved under the
new config file.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
174
Edit Non-Active Configuration Files
Introduction
The PBXgateway can be used in different applications requiring different
parameters. The system administrator may need to set up separate
configuration files to accommodate custom parameters for each application.
The ability to modify any non-active configuration file, allows the system
administrator a method for quickly setting up new units based on existing
configuration parameters.
IMPORTANT: To edit the “active” config file, use the Configuration Menu
(see Chapter 4).
Procedure
Access the Edit Configuration Menu using the following path:
Path: Utilities->File->Edit Config
Choose Switch or Remote and select a config file from the available files,
press Enter.
Modify the necessary parameters as required.
(Refer to Chapter 3, for more information)
As required, select Save and press Enter to save changes. The following
message appears:
Save changes to Filename _____.rem (Remote) or .swt (Switch)?
(Y)es (N)o (S)pecify different filename
Press (Y) to save changes
Press (N) to not save changes
or Press (S) to specify a different file name.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
175
Creating a New Config File
Introduction
The PBXgateway can be used in different applications requiring different
parameters. The system administrator may need to set up separate
configuration files to accommodate custom parameters for each application.
Example: The creation of a new Remote config file on the PBXgateway, and
copying that new file to the Remote unit.
The ability to modify any configuration file not in use, allows the system
administrator a method for quickly setting up new units based on existing
configuration parameters.
Procedure
Access the Edit Configuration Menu using the following path:
Path: Utilities->File->Edit Configuration
Message reads: Create a new:
Select (R) for Remote file. Press Enter
or
Select (S) for Switch file. Press Enter
Select <new file>. Press Enter.
Enter New file name:________, (without extension)
press Enter.
Note: File name must not exceed twelve characters and does not require a file
extension. The MI will automatically assign an extension depending on the
unit.
Modify the necessary parameters as required.
(Refer to Chapter 3, page 55 for more information)
Select Save Action and press Enter to save changes. The following message
appears:
Save changes to Filename _____.rem (Remote) or .swt (Switch)?
(Y)es (N)o (S)pecify different file name
Press (Y) to save changes.
Press (N) to not save changes.
or Press (S) to specify a different file name.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
176
Upgrading the Software
Visit the Service & Support section of www.mck.com to download the latest software files. The software
file can be placed to the PBXgateway/EXTender 6000 for upgrading via FTP, Zmodem methods.
The upgrade process involves three phases. These should be executed in the following order:
1. File Management.
2. File Upload
3. File Upgrade
Note:
The PBXgateway/EXTender 6000 use image files with *.mcb extension, while the EXTender 4000 uses image file
with *.mlb extension. The file management, upload and upgrade instructions are the same for all versions.
File Management
This phase includes the tasks of examining the flash file system, saving an active image file as the
default, deleting outdated files and optimizing the flash file system.
Examining the flash file system
This procedure determines how many image files are on the flash file system.
Procedure
1. Connect to the MI via a HyperTerminal or a Telnet session.
2. Access the Image List menu using the following path:
Path: Gateway->Utilities->Upgrade->Image List
3. Press Enter, the following screen appears and list the images in the file system:
4. If there is only the “Default.mcb” in the list goes to the section “Optimize the Flash File System”;
otherwise follow the steps to save the active image file as the default.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
177
Save Active File as the Default
This will delete the existing “default.mcb” file from the unit and take the image that is currently “live” and
rename it to “default.mcb”. We are going to leave a copy of the currently “live” image on the unit after the
upgrade is complete. If the currently live image is “default.mcb”, you will receive this message, “Currently
running default image”.
Caution:
This process requires system to be rebooted and causing active phones to be out of service for a
few minutes.
The procedure outlined below includes all the steps to save an active image file as the default.
Procedure
1. Connect to the MI via a HyperTerminal or a Telnet session.
2. Access the Default Image menu using the following path:
Path: Gateway->Utilities->Upgrade->Default Image
3. Press Enter and the following screen appears:
4. Type y (Yes) to save the image file being used as default.mcb, and reboot the system.
Delete Outdated Files
The procedure outlined below includes all the steps to delete files out-of-date.
Procedure:
1. Access the File Delete menu using the following path:
Path: Gateway->Utilities->Upgrade->Delete
2. All files not in use are listed.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
178
3. Place the asterisk next to the file(s) to be deleted and press Enter.
4. Press y (Yes) to permanently delete a file. Repeat this step until there are no more files to delete. It is
necessary to delete all other mcb files from the unit to make room for the
new file.
Note: The file saved as default.mcb and the active image file will not be included in the list of files
that can be deleted.
Query Flash Memory Space
Before loading image file into the Flash File System, ensure that there is enough free memory space in
the Flash File System for the image file. If the free space is less than 3000000 bytes, please consider
delete files which is not in used by the system (See Delete Outdated Files).
Procedure:
1. Access the Free Space menu using the following path:
Path: Gateway->Utilities->Upgrade->Free Space
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
179
Optimize the Flash File System
The procedure outlined below includes all the steps to optimize the flash file system. This will speed up
the subsequent file upload.
Warning: Do not optimize the flash file when the PBXgateway/Extender 6000 is active. If the flash file is
optimized while the unit is being used, the voice prompts for the Interactive Voice Response (IVR) system
will be non-operational.
Procedure
1. Access the Optimize menu using the following path:
Path: Gateway->Utilities->Upgrade->Optimize
2. Press Y to optimize the flash file system performance.
File Upload
This section covers methods for uploading images files: FTP, Zmodem Console and In-band Upload.
Via FTP Upload
The procedure outlined below includes all the steps to upload image files into the PBXgateway/Extender
6000 using the FTP Upload method.
Note:
•
•
Each MCK unit should have Telnet and FTP enabled and an accessible (pingable) IP
address assigned before proceeding. Please refer to your System Administrator's Guide
for more information.
Note: Files to be uploaded to the PBXgateway/Extender 6000 via FTP must have
extensions *.mcb.
Procedure
1. Begin an FTP session to the PBXgateway/Extender 6000 by selecting Start/Run from the Windows
taskbar. The screen below appears. Press OK
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
180
.
2. Press Enter at the User prompt.
3. At the Password prompt, press Enter if no password has been assigned to the unit. If a password
has been assigned to the unit, enter the password and then press Enter.
4. At the ftp> prompt, type in binary and press Enter.
5. At the ftp> prompt, type in hash and press Enter.
You are now ready to begin uploading the file to the MCK unit. Please be sure you know the location
of the mcb file on your local PC before continuing.
6. At the 'ftp>' prompt, type put c:\ ___ \ v?????.mcb and press Enter. The '___' represents the full
path to the file on your local PC. The "v?????.mcb" represents the proper filename of the image file
(i.e. v332r2.mcb).The file transfer begins. Transference status is indicated by a stream of # signs
running across the screen. The transfer should be completed in approximately 15 minutes or less.
7. At the ftp> prompt, type quit and press Enter once the upload is completed. The new image file has
been uploaded. Continue with section ‘In-band Upload’ if you need to use the in-band connection to
get the file to the other unit via its in-band connection (i.e. over the T1 or IP network). Once
completed, the image file is ready for upgrade, go to the section ‘File Upgrade’.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
181
Via FTP Client
The PBXgateway/EXTender 6000 can be act as a FTP client to download the image file from a FTP
Server via a LAN connection or Ethernet crossover cable.
Note: Each MCK unit should have Telnet and FTP enabled and an accessible (pingable) IP address
assigned before proceeding. Please refer to your System Administrator's Guide for more
information.
The procedure outlined below includes all the steps to download image files into the
PBXgateway/Extender 6000 using FTP Client method.
Procedure
1. Access the FTP Client menu using the following path:
Path: Gateway->Utilities->Upgrade->Upload File->FTP Client
2. Press Enter and the Extender FTP Shell will appear:
3. At the ftp> prompt, type dir xxx.xxx.xxx yyy zzz c:\___ and press enter to check if the *.mcb image
file to be download is available in the directory of the FTP Server. (Where xxx.xxx.xxx represents the
IP Address of the FTP Server, yyy zzz represents the login User /Password for the FTP Server and
c:\____ represents the full path which contents the image file.)
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
182
4. At the ftp> prompt, type get xxx.xxx.xxx yyy zzz c:\___\v???.mcb v???.mcb and press
enter to
download the image file to the unit. (Where xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP Address of the
FTP
Server, yyy zzz represents the login User /Password for the FTP Server.
c:\____\v???.mcb
represents the full path and the file name of the image file on the FTP
Server. And the last
v???.mcb parameter represents the local file name to be saved on the Flash File System.)
The file transfer begins. Transfer status is indicated by a stream of … signs running across the screen.
The transfer should be completed in approximately 15 minutes or less.
5. Once the upload is completed, at the ftp> prompt, press the ESC to exit the Extender FTP Shell.
Continue with section ‘In-band Upload’ if you need to use the in-band connection to get the file to the
other unit via its in-band connection (i.e. over the T1 or IP network). Once completed, the image file is
ready for upgrade, go to the section ‘File Upgrade’.
Via Zmodem Console upload
The procedure outlined below includes all the steps to upload image files into the PBXgateway/EXTender
6000 using the Zmodem protocol. Files to be uploaded using the Zmodem protocol must have extensions
*.mcb.
Establish a direct serial connection to the Gateway via the console port located in the front of the unit.
Procedure
1. Access the Zmodem Upload menu using the following path:
Path: Gateway->Utilities->Upgrade->Upload File->Zmodem Upload
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
183
2. Select n (No) when asked to optimize. The flash file system was optimized in the file management
process.
3. The next screen will contain a warning about interrupting the upload. Press y (Yes) to continue.
4. When you see this message: "Starting Zmodem Session - Hit Ctrl-X 5 Times to Cancel", go to the
HyperTerminal menu bar and select Transfer / Send File. Browse to the location to the file on your
PC. Highlight the file (mcb extension), and select Open. Be sure the protocol is set as Zmodem.
Press Send to begin the transfer.
5. Once the transfer has begun, Hyperterminal will display a status window indicating the progress of
the upload and inform you when it has been uploaded successfully. Continue with section ‘In-band
Upload’ if you need to use the in-band connection to get the file to the other unit via its in-band
connection (i.e. over the T1 or IP network). Once completed, the image file is ready for upgrade, go to
the section ‘File Upgrade’.
In-Band Upload
Getting the new image file across the in-band connection to the other unit –
Note: You will only be able to transfer the file across the in-band connection when 1.) The current WAN1
and/or WAN2 state is ACTIVE, or 2.) There is at least one phone active via an IP connection between
units.
Very Important: ONLY *.mcb files should be transferred between a PBXgateway and an EXTender
6000. Other MCK products use other file types, so make sure you know which product is at the
other end of the connection. Please refer to www.mck.com to download the proper files for each
product and instructions on how each is upgraded.
A. Copy To Gateway/Remote
In this case, the new image file has been uploaded to the local (PBXgateway/EXTender 6000) unit, and
the file will be sent to far-end (PBXgateway/EXTender 6000) unit.
Procedure
1. On the Main Menu of the Management Interface, choose Gateway Login or Remote Login
(depends on which unit you’re logged into). Press Enter.
2. Once logged in to the other unit, please perform steps in “File Management’ section to cleanup the
Flash File System. We need to do the same file management techniques with the other unit. Once the
file management of the other unit is complete, log out of that unit and return to the original unit.
3. Navigate to Utilities >File >Copy to Remote or Utilities > File Copy to Gateway (again, this will
depend on which unit you are logged into). Press Enter.
A dialog box displaying how each port is connecting back and forth between units will appear. Put the
asterisk on the port that you want to transfer the file to (it’s actually the port of the local unit so you
should know which ports go to which units) and press Enter. You will be prompted for a password.
This is the password of the “far-end” unit. If there is a password, enter it now; otherwise just press
Enter to continue. A dialog box listing the files that can be transferred will appear. Choose the file that
you just uploaded from the list and press Enter. When asked to enter the destination filename, put in
the proper name of the file, but leave off the mcb extension. Once you press Enter, the transfer will
begin. Time of an in-band transfer will vary depending on the type of connection. You will receive a
“Copy Succeeded” message when the transfer is complete. Now we just need to get the units
upgraded.
B. Copy From Gateway/Remote
In this case, the new image file has been uploaded to the far-end (PBXgateway/EXTender 6000) unit, and
the file will be copy to the local (PBXgateway/EXTender 6000) unit.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
184
Procedure
1. Connect to the MI via a HyperTerminal or a Telnet session.
2. Once logged in, please perform steps in “File Management’ section to cleanup the Flash File System.
We need to do the same file management techniques with the other unit.
3. Navigate to Utilities >File >Copy From Gtwy/Rmt or Utilities>Upgrade>Upload File>Copy From
Gtwy/Rmt (again, this will depend on which unit you are logged into). Press Enter.
A dialog box displaying how each port is connecting back and forth between units will appear. Put the
asterisk on the port that you want to transfer the file to (it’s actually the port of the local unit so you
should know which ports go to which units) and press Enter. You will be prompted for a password.
This is the password of the “far-end” unit. If there is a password, enter it now; otherwise just press
Enter to continue. A dialog box listing the files that can be transferred will appear. Choose the file that
you just uploaded from the list and press Enter. When asked to enter the destination filename, put in
the proper name of the file, but leave off the mcb extension. Once you press Enter, the transfer will
begin. Time of an in-band transfer will vary depending on the type of connection. You will receive a
“Copy Succeeded” message when the transfer is complete. Once completed, the image file is ready
for upgrade, go to the section ‘File Upgrade’.
File Upgrade
The procedure outlined below includes all the steps to upgrade an image file.
Caution:
This process requires system to be rebooted and will cause active phones to be out of service for
a few minutes.
Procedure
1. Go to the Image File menu using the following path:
Path: Gateway->Utilities->Upgrade->Image File
2. Press Enter. A note about the need for the file to be on the unit will appear. Press y (Yes) to continue.
3. Select the new image file (file uploaded) and press Enter. This will include a process to verify the
integrity of the uploaded file. If the image file fails the verification, error will be display on screen. If
this occurs please re-start the Upgrade Process.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
185
4. Once the file verification has been passed, press y (Yes) when prompted to change the image file.
5. A warning screen will appear. Press y (Yes) to continue upgrade with the selected image file and
reboot the system. Otherwise, select n (No) to abort the upgrade.
Caution: Users will be dropped during the reboot. Service will be reinstated in approximately 3
minutes.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
186
Using an External WAN Connection
Introduction
The PBXgateway is capable of transferring files using the external WAN
connection between the Gateway and Remote units. This procedure is used to
“put” a new file (.m6b or .rem (Remote) or .swt (Switch)) onto the Flash file
system of the opposite unit.
Procedure
1. Access the Copy to Remote/Switch Menu using the following path:
Path: Utilities->File->Copy to (Remote/Switch)
2. Enter the Admin password, if required for the unit you are accessing.
3. Select a file to copy from the list displayed.
4. When prompted, Enter a Destination Filename.
Note: File name must not exceed twelve characters and should not include
a file extension. The Management Interface (MI) will automatically assign an
extension depending on the type of file (Switch or Remote).
5. Press Enter. The upload process will begin.
Note: The transfer process may take some time especially if you have
active phones.
6. When the download is complete, the MI displays the message:
Copy Succeeded
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
187
Using a Direct Console Connection
The PBXgateway is capable of transferring text files using a direct console connection between
an EXTender unit and a PC.
EXTender 6000 and PBXgateway: .m6t
EXTender 4000: .mlt
This procedure is helpful when a LAN connection is not available.
Note: This procedure is only used for uploading an encoded text file to the unit. An encoded
text file is a firmware file encoded as text.
Procedure
1. Connect a PC to the PBXgateway through the console port. (see Chapter 3, page 44, for more
information)
2. Open an Enhanced Terminal Interface (ETI) program. Example: Hyperterminal
3. Access the Console Upload Menu using the following path:
Path: Utilities->Upgrade->Console Upload
Note: You will be prompted to “Optimize the Flash File System”, select (Y) or yes to optimize.
4. The following screen will appear. Press “y” to continue.
Figure 93: Console Upload Screen
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
188
5. Select Transfer-Send Text File command from the ETI program. Locate the text file to be sent and
press Open.
Figure 94: Send text file screen
The file upload will begin.
Note: Files labeled “.m6t or .mlt” are text versions of the firmware, where as “.m6b or .mpb” files are
binary files.
The screen will display the Flash activity by a series of dots (…….).
Note: Do not quit the application or stop the file upload until the process is complete. Once the file is
copied to the unit, it is automatically saved as binary and renamed with a M6B extension or MLB for the
4000.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
189
Chapter 7: Glossary
This Chapter provides a list of terms that are used in the operation and set up of the PBXgateway and Remote as
well as other MCK communications products.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
190
10/100Base-T
A networking standard that supports data transfer rates up to 100 Mbps (100 megabits per second). 100Base-T
is based on the older Ethernet standard of 10Base-T. Because it is 10 times faster then Ethernet it is referred to
as “Fast Ethernet”. Officially, the 100Base-T standard is IEEE 802.3u.
120 vac
120 volt alternating current (North American standard electrical supply).
A
ACD
Automated Call Distributor. A telephone facility that handles incoming calls and distributes them among several
employees, usually in a particular department. For example, a Help Desk would use ACD to distribute calls to the
employees who are currently not on a call.
ADPCM
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation. A reduced bit rate variant of PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) audio
encoding.
ADSI
Analog Display Service Interface. This is a Bellcore standard that defines the protocol on the flow of information –
between a switch, server, voicemail system or a service bureau – and a telephone, PC, data device or another
communicating device that has a screen. In simpler terms, it is a system that allows a consumer’s telephone to
receive, display and interact with a wide array of services.
Algorithm
A formula or set of steps for solving a particular problem. To be an algorithm, a set of rules must be unambiguous
and have a clear stopping point. A compression algorithm uses a formula to compress and decompress voice
when transmitted across a network.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol. A network layer protocol used to convert an IP address into a physical address
(called a DLC address), such as an Ethernet address. A host wishing to obtain a physical address broadcasts an
ARP request onto the TCP/IP network. The host on the network that has the IP address in the request then
replies with its physical hardware address.
AT Commands
In modems, a set of commands that control the modem or alter its characteristics. Originally developed by Hayes,
the AT command set is now an industry standard.
Auto-Attendant
Is used to relay company information or allow callers to direct themselves to a specific user’s extension without
the need for human interaction.
B
Bandwidth
The width of a communications channel. Measured in bits per second (bps).
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
191
Baud Rate
The speed in Kbps at which digital data can be transmitted.
Branch Office
The remote location of the corporate office.
C
CSU
Channel Service Unit. A device to terminate a digital channel on a customer’s premise.
ConneX
MCK’s proprietary feature allowing single remote users to access the corporate PBX/KSU features from an
analog or cell phone when away from the corporate office.
D
DB-25
The standard 25-pin connector used for RS-232 serial data communications.
DB-9
The standard 9-pin RS-232 serial port on most computers
DCE/DTE
Short for Data Terminal Equipment, a device that controls data flowing to or from a computer. The term is most
often used in reference to serial communications defined by the RS-232C standard. This standard defines the two
ends of the communications channel as being a DTE and Data Communications Equipment (DCE) device. In
practical terms, the DCE is usually a modem and the DTE is the computer itself, or more precisely, the computer's
UART chip. For internal modems, the DCE and DTE are part of the same device.
Dedicated Subscriber Lines
Communication lines (usually twisted pair) that are used to connect on-premise telephone equipment (such as a
PBX/KSU) to the Central Office. Also referred to as direct lines.
Default Gateway
Normally the IP address of a router. Used to specify where IP packets are to be sent that are not destined for the
same network number.
Dial Line
A telephone line which is part of the Public Switched Telephone Network and is accessed through an automatic
dial-up function.
DNS
Domain Naming System. A mechanism used in the internet for translating names of host computers into
addresses.
Example: DNS would change a computer name such as MCK.com to the actual numeric IP address of
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
192
Domain Name
The fully qualified name of a domain of a network. Example “MCK.com”.
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory. A readable/writable memory chip used to store data.
DS0
Digital Service, Level 0. It is 64,000 bps, the worldwide standard speed for digitizing one voice conversation using
PCM.
DSP
Digital Signal Processor. A specialized computer chip designed to perform speedy and complex operations on
digitized signals.
DTMF
Short for Dual Tone Multi-Frequency, the system used by touch-tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific
frequency (consisting of two separate tones) to each key so that it can easily be identified by a microprocessor.
E
Ethernet
A local area network used for connecting computers, printers, workstations, terminals, servers, etc. Ethernet
operates over twisted wire and over coaxial cable at speeds up to 100Mbps.
F
Facility
Transmission facilities. Usually a two metallic pair set of cords, but can be telephone company carriers, T-1,
microwave or dial-up telecommunications lines.
Firewall
A system designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network. Firewalls can be implemented in
both hardware and software, or a combination of both. Firewalls are frequently used to prevent unauthorized
Internet users from accessing private networks connected to the Internet, especially intranets. All messages
entering or leaving the intranet pass through the firewall, which examines each message and blocks those that do
not meet the specified security criteria.
Full Duplex
Refers to the transmission of data in two directions simultaneously. For example, a telephone is a full-duplex
device because both parties can talk at once. In contrast, a walkie-talkie is a half-duplex device because only one
party can transmit at a time.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. A connection protocol used to send and receive files.
G
G.729A
The ITU (International Telecommunications Union) standard voice algorithm for the coding of speech signals in
telecommunication networks.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
193
H
Half Duplex
Refers to the transmission of data in just one direction at a time. For example, a walkie-talkie is a half-duplex
device because only one party can talk at a time. In contrast, a telephone is a full-duplex device because both
parties can talk simultaneously. Duplex modes often are used in reference to network data transmissions.
HDLC
High-level Data Link Control, a transmission protocol used at the data link layer (layer 2) of the OSI seven-layer
model for data communications. The HDLC protocol embeds information is a data frame that allows devices to
control data flow and correct errors.
Host Name
The name of a computer or HOST as specified on a DNS server.
HTML
Short for HyperText Markup Language, the authoring language used to create documents or applications on the
World Wide Web. HTML is similar to SGML, although it is not a strict subset. HTML defines the structure and
layout of a Web document or application by using a variety of tags and attributes.
I
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network. ISDN comes in two basic types: BRI, which is 144,000 bps and designed for
the desktop, and PRI, which is 1,544,000 bps and designed for telephone switches. BRI uses four unshielded
normal telephone wires (two twisted pairs) to deliver two “Bearer” (B channel) of 64K bps each and one “data” (D
channel) of 16K bps.
In-Band
Transmission within a frequency range normally used for voice transmission. Contrasted with Out-of-Band
signaling, which uses frequencies outside of the voice range.
IP
Internet Protocol. The most important protocol on which the Internet is based. The IP Protocol is a standard
describing software that keeps track of the internetwork addresses for different nodes, routes outgoing messages,
and recognizes incoming messages.
IP Address
A 32-bit address, used in IP routing. Basically, this address identifies a device within a network using a sequence
of numbers.
J
Jitter Delay
Is caused by transmission delays in an Internet telephony (VoIP) network . As the device receives voice packets,
it adds small amounts of delay to the packets so that all the packets appear to have been received without delays.
Voice signals are sequential by nature (i.e., the must be played back in the order in which they were sent) and
this ensures that the resecived packets are in the correct order. Jitter can result in choppy audio signals.
Generally, any distortion of a signal or image caused by poor synchronization.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
194
L
LAN
Local Area Network. A short distance data communications network used to link computers and peripheral
devices (such as printers).
LED
Light-emitting diode. A semiconductor diode which emits light when a current is passed through it, indicating that
the power is on.
M
MI
Management Interface. A VT-100 style Terminal Emulation (TA) program which provides the system administrator
with full configuration and status capabilities for the PBXgateway and multiple Remote units.
N
Network Hub
A common connection point for devices in a network. Hubs are commonly used to connect segments of a LAN. A
hub contains multiple ports. When a packet arrives at one port, it is copied to the other ports so that all segments
of the LAN can see all packets.
Network Number
Often associated with Subnet. Specifies an individual network of devices that communicate via IP to each other.
Example “192.168.1.0”.
O
Out-of-Band
With out-of-Band signaling a separate narrow signaling band within the 4-kHz bandwidth is used to control
signals.
P
Packet Transmission
A piece of a message is transmitted over a packet switching network. One of the key features of a packet is that it
contains the destination address in addition to the data. In IP networks, packets are often called datagram.
PBX
Private Branch Exchange. A small version of the phone company’s larger central switching office usually installed
in a corporate facility.
Phone-Set Interface
An interface with the Remote units through a users phone providing a limited set of configuration parameters.
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network..
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
195
Punch Block
A device used to connect one group of wires to another. A punch block is used to connect the digital lines from
the PBX to the RJ-21 cable connected to the PBXgateway.
Q
QOS
Quality of Service. A measure of the telephone service quality provided to a subscriber.
R
Remote Unit
The device that connects to the remote telephones and communicates with the PBXgateway at the Corporate
facility.
RJ-11
A six conductor modular jack that is typically wired for four conductors. It is the most common jack used for
connecting telephones, modems and fax machines.
RJ-21
A 25-pair connector used for connecting the PBXgateway to the PBX.
Router
A device used to forward packets from one or more Network Numbers, to the intended destinations.
RS-232
9 or 25 Position Non-Synchronous Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating
Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange (ANS/EIA/TIA-574-90)
RS-530
Physically it is the same as an RS-232 cable, except the RS-530 cable is designed for devices that transmit at
higher speeds.
RTP
Real Time Protocol. A protocol designed to address problems caused when real-time exchanges, such as voice
are transported over LANs designed for data.
RVP™
Remote Voice Protocol packet encapsulation protocol.
S
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol.
SPID
Service Profile Identifier, a number that identifies a specific ISDN line. When you obtain ISDN service, your
telephone company assigns a SPID to your line. Part of the initialization procedure is to configure your ISDN
terminal adapter to use this SPID.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
196
Subnet
A smaller network that is part of a main network.
Subnet Mask
Used to mask bits of an IP address to determine which packets are destined for the Network that the device is
connected to.
Switch Unit
The PBXgateway unit that connects to the PBX/KSU
Synchronous
A method of communication utilizing a master clock to synchronize the timing between successive bits,
characters or events.
Sync Rate
The data transfer speed or rate of the synchronous serial port of the network device connected to the WAN port of
the PBXgateway or EXTender 6000 Remote unit. The Sync Rates of the serial ports must match.
System Administrator
Basically, the person in charge of managing the network.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
197
T
T1
A digital transmission link with a capacity of 1.544Mbps.
TA
Terminal Adapter. Allows non-ISDN terminals to operate on ISDN lines.
TCP
Tele Connect Protocol. An IP port, as specified in the OSI model.
TCP/IP
Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol.
Teleworker
An employee that works from home while communicating with the corporate office by telephone, fax and/or
computer.
Telnet
A connection type protocol.
U
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. An IP port as specified in the OSI model.
V
V.35
A ITU-T standard for a synchronous serial interface between the Switch or Remote unit and a network device for
data rates greater than 19.2Kbps.
Voice Compression
Enables voice to be transmitted over a network that may not have adequate or required bandwidth without a
major reduction in voice quality.
Voice Link
A proprietary term referring to MCK’s method of connecting a remote user.
VOIP
Voice Over IP. Providing voice communications over the IP network.
W
WAN
Wide Area Network, group of two or more computer systems linked together. With a WAN the computers are
farther apart and are connected by telephone lines or radio waves.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
198
Appendix A: Management Interface (MI) Menus
Introduction
The PBXgateway Management Interface (MI) provides the system
administrator with a VT-100 style interface for the complete configuration of
both the Gateway and Remote units.
Main Menu
The Main Menu which appears when the MI is first entered, displays the
following submenus;
Configuration
The Configuration submenus contain Port and WAN set up, Log information,
and System parameters.
Status
The Status submenus display specific functional information necessary to
troubleshoot and analyze unit performance.
Utilities
The Utilities submenus contain system and diagnostic utilities used for
copying or deleting configuration files.
Remote/Switch Login
This command will connect you to the unit at the alternate site.
Logout
This command will terminate the MI session.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
199
Main Menu
Menu
Sub-Menus
For more
Info see
Configuration
Port
Default
Ports 1-8
WAN
Connect (R)
Analog Card (B)
Log
IP
System
Save
Page 201
Page 201
Page 201
Page 203
Page 204
Page 204
Page 207
Page 208
Page 210
-
Status
Port
WAN
Connect
Log
IP
System
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Utilities
System
File
Diagnostics
Upgrade
Page 211
Page 211
Page 213
Page 211
Remote Login
Page 105
Logout
Page 115
Table 20:
Main Menu
(R) Applies to the Branch Office & EXTender 4000 units only.
(B) Applies to the Branch Office unit only.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
200
Port Menu
Menu
Parameters
Possible
Value
Default
value
Default
Enabled
Yes
No
[
]
Disabled
Enabled
[
]
--
Yes
65
Disabled
67
109
--
110
202
Default
65
Default
109
Password
Auto Connect
(R)
Banner (R)
Voice (G)
Ports 1-8
or 12
Enabled
For more info
see page
Auto Connect
(R)
User ID
Default
Yes
No
Enabled
Disabled
[
]
Password
[
]
67
Description
[
]
-
Voice (G)
--
Banner (R)
[
68
202
]
110
Logout Code (R)
(Avaya Protocol)
134
MSB Key (R)
(Nortel Protocol)
136
Table 21: Port Menu
(R) Applies to the Branch Office & EXTender 4000 units only.
(G) Applies to the PBXgateway unit only
.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
201
Voice Menu
Parameters
Possible
Values
Default
value
Method
ADPCM 32
ADPCM 24
G.729A,
G.711,
ADPCM 32
63
Path
Dynamic or
Constant
25-150
In-band
Constant
63
25
Out-of-Band
63
131
Attenuation
DTMF (Avaya
Protocol only)
For more info see
page
Out-of-band
Silence
Detection
Jitter Delay
Enabled
Disabled
0-250
Enabled
63
0
134
Packet Size
1-12
2
136
Packet Trace
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
136
Table 22:
Voice Menu
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
202
WAN Menu (WAN 1 & WAN 2)
Parameters
Possible Value
Enabled
Yes
No
Mode
Sync-V.35
Sync-RS232
Sync-RS530
Sync Set upMultiples of 56K or
Sync Rate
64K
Table 23: WAN Menu
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
Default
value
For more info
see page
WAN 1 Yes
WAN 2 - No
Sync-V.35
70
[384000]
71
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
71
203
Connect Menu (R)
Parameters
Possible Value
Default value
Type
RVP_over_IP
RVP_Direct
RVP_Direct
RVP_Direct
For more info
see page
106
--
106
RVP_over_IP
-Table 24: Connect Menu
107
(R) Applies to the Branch Office & EXTender 4000 units only.
Analog Card (G) & (B)
Menu
Parameters
Defaults
Ports 1-8
Enabled
Default
value
Yes
No
Key
Ring
Table 25:
Possible
Value
[
]
Yes
No
For more
info see
page
Yes
112
4
Yes
112
112
Analog Menu
(G) Applies to the PBXgateway unit only.
(B) Applies to the Branch Office unit only.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
204
RVP_Direct Menu (R)
Parameters
Possible Value
Default
value
For more info
see page
Primary Interface
WAN1
WAN2
WAN1
106
Secondary Interface
NONE
WAN1
WAN2
[
]
NONE
106
100
144
Utilization
Table 26:
RVP_Direct Menu
(R) Applies to the Branch Office & EXTender 4000 units only.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
205
RVP_over_IP Menu (R)
Parameters
Possible Value
Default PortValid IP address
IP Destination
Ports 1 to 8 or
Valid IP address
12IP Destination
Table 27: RVP_over_IP Menu
Default value
For more info
see page
[
]
107
[
]
107
(R) Applies to the Branch Office & EXTender 4000 units only.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
206
Log Menu
Parameters
Possible
Value
Default
value
Size
4096131072
Info
32768
140
Info
138
Debug
<Default>
138
MGMT Prior
Trace
<Default>
138
NET Prior
Fatal
<Default>
138
Port Prior
Error
<Default>
138
Default
Priority
SYS Prior
For more info
see Page
Warning
Table 28:
Log Menu
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
207
IP Menu
Parameters
Possible Value
Default
value
For more
info
see page
Address
Valid IP address
[
]
76
Subnet
Mask
Default
Router
Telnet
Valid IP address
[
]
76
Valid IP address
[
]
76
Enabled
Enabled
78
Disabled
78
Enabled –
Yes/No
No
81
Server IP
Address
Domain Name
[
]
81
[
]
81
SNMP
-
-
209
Web
Server
Syslog
-
-
144
-
-
209
Disabled
FTP
Enabled
Disabled
DNS
Table 29:
System Menu
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
208
SNMP Menu
Parameters
Possible
Value
Default
value
Enabled
Yes
No
]
No
Trap Priority
Error
Warning
Info
Fatal
Error
143
Trap Path
LAN
WAN
Both
LAN
143
Trap Hosts
For more info
see page
142
Sys Contact
]
141
Sys Location
]
142
Table 30:
SNMP Menu
Syslog Menu
Parameters
Possible
Value
Enabled
No
Yes
]
Host
Default
value
For more info
see page
No
133
]
ID
Default
Priority
SYS Prior
133
Info
Debug
Info
139
<Default>
139
MGMT Prior
Trace
139
NET Prior
Fatal
139
Port Prior
Error
139
Warning
Table 31:
SysLog Menu
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
209
System Menu
Parameters
Possible
Value
Name
[
Use Switch Time (R)
Yes
No
[
Switch Time Offset (R)
Console Baud
Table 32:
9600
19200
38400
2400
4800
System Menu
Default
value
For more
info
see page
]
]
82
No
-
0
-
9600
83
(R) Applies to the Branch Office unit only.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
210
Utilities Menu
Menu
Parameters
System
Set
Password
Set Date
-
-
212
Clear log
-
-
129
Dump All
-
-
132
Reset Stats
-
-
139
Reboot
-
-
114
Copy to
(unit)
Delete
-
-
187
-
-
-
Edit Config
-
-
175
-
136
File
Optimize
Table 33:
Default
value
-
-
-
-
Diagnostics
Upgrade
Possible
Value
For more info
see page
86
213
Console
Upload
Image File
-
-
188
-
-
Error!
Bookmark not
defined.
Configure
File
-
-
174
Utilities Menu
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
211
Set Date Menu
Parameters
Possible
Value
Default
value
Month
Jan-Dec
Current
month
For more info
see page
85
Day of month
]
85
Year
]
85
Hour
]
85
Minute
]
85
Second
]
85
Daylight
Savings
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Table 34:
85
85
Set Date Menu
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
212
Diagnostics Menu
Menu
Parameters
Test IP
Begin Test
Test
WAN
Possible
Value
IP Address
]
Count
]
Default
value
5
Begin Test
158
WAN Port
]
1
-
Count
]
20
-
Packet Size
]
10
-
Timeout
]
10
Reset
WAN
Reset
Port
Table 35:
For more info
see page
-
Diagnostics Menu
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
213
Appendix B: Bandwidth Requirements
This Appendix provides information on the required bandwidth necessary to accommodate remote users
connected to the PBXgateway using a synchronous-serial connection via a WAN port.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
214
Overview
One of the most important factors in the success of your PBXgateway is to determine the necessary
network bandwidth needed for your application. This Appendix will explain how to determine the size of
the required bandwidth that will be needed in your application of the PBXgateway units. Determining the
appropriate bandwidth is truly a function of two factors:
•
Number of Users (Phones)
•
Voice Compression for Each User
Number of Users
The number of users is the number of simultaneous users (digital PBX phones) that will be extended at
any given branch location. Physically, there could be up to twelve simultaneous users for each
PBXgateway unit.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
215
Voice Compression
The PBXgateway deploys voice compression in order to extend multiple users across fewer data
channels. The PBXgateway supports the following voice compression algorithms: 32 Kbps ADPCM, 24
Kbps ADPCM and G.729A. Depending on the voice compression algorithm selected, you may need
anywhere from 16 Kbps (G.729A) up to 40 Kbps (ADPCM 32) per user.
Compression Algorithms vs. Corresponding Bandwidth Size
(
G.711
ADPCM 32
ADPCM 24
G.729A
64 (72) Kbps
32 (40) Kbps
24 (32) Kbps
8 (16) Kbps
) Maximum value of the combined compression bandwidth and the signaling between the Switch and
Remote units. This number reflects both parties talking simultaneously in a voice conversation.
Under normal conditions, this number will be lower.
Using the bandwidth management formula on the next page, you can determine the total bandwidth
necessary to support your application. If you have excess bandwidth on your network circuit, your
network terminating devices could allow you to use that bandwidth to connect to a router or even another
PBXgateway. In order to accomplish this, you must have the multi-port capability on your CSU/DSU. For
more information on your network terminating devices, please see the Network Terminating Equipment
section of the Quick Installation Guide.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
216
Selecting the Proper Voice Compression
The best voice quality is achieved by using the ADPCM 32 compression. The maximum quality comes at
the expense of the highest utilized bandwidth. The largest voice compression is achieved by using
G.729A. If you are using this algorithm, you will save on bandwidth and still achieve voice quality that is
regarded as near toll. If absolute conversation quality is your focus and bandwidth is no object, you
probably want to select ADPCM 32. If bandwidth is a priority you will employ G.729A.
If you are using different compression algorithms for each individual user (port), use the following formula
to establish your aggregate data bandwidth needs.
A
x 16 + B x 32 + C x 40 = D
A: number of G.729A Users
B: number of ADPCM 24 Users
C: number of ADPCM 32 Users
D: Total Bandwidth
Divide this bandwidth by either 64 or 56, in order to establish the correct number of DS0 channels to be
used.
Example: If your DS0s on your CSU/DSUs are set up for 56Kbps, use 56 and if they are set up for
64Kbps DS0s, use 64.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
217
Appendix C: EXTender 6000 Phone-Set Interface
Provided for reference only.
This Chapter provides information on the Phone-Set Interface. This interface provides the system
administrator with limited configuration parameters using a digital telephone keypad for input commands.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
218
Phone-Set Interface
Introduction
The Phone-Set interface is used for setting limited configuration parameters for
the EXTender 6000 and EXTender 4000 remote units from a two-wire digital
phone.
Settings include:
•
Console Data Rate
•
IP Parameters
•
Default Route
Accessing the Press ‘Hold’ key (on the phone) four times.
Phone-Set
interface
Menu Legend The user navigates through the Phone-Set interface using the keypad on the
phone. The menu legend below, shows each applicable numeric key and the
screen or command that it corresponds to within the interface.
Prv: Previous Screen
Nxt: Next Screen
Ok: Accept changes
1: Prv
1: Prv
3: Nxt
2:Ok
Figure 95:
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
Menu Legend
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
219
Note: Once in the interface this is the first screen displayed.
2: Ok
3: Nxt
Exit Admin Menu
1: Prv 2: Ok 3: Nxt
1: Prv 2: Ok
Set Console
Set IP Parms
1: Prv 2: Ok 3: Nxt
3: Nxt
9600
19200
38400
2400
4800
Data Rate: 9600
1: Prv 2: Ok 3: Nxt
1: Prv 2: Ok 3: Nxt
IP Address
IP Mask
Enter IP Address
Enter IP Mask
Drop to Accept
use "*" for "."
Hold to Cancel
Conf to Delete
Use * for .
Drop to Accept
use "*" for "."
Hold to Cancel
Conf to Delete
Use * for .
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
1: Prv 2: Ok
Default Router
Drop to Accept
use "*" for "."
Hold to Cancel
Conf to Delete
Use * for .
0.0.0.0
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
220
Appendix D: SNMP
This Chapter provides information on the PBXgateway Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
parameter.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
221
Introduction
The PBXgateway supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) for monitoring the
PBXgateway and multiple Remote units.
SNMP: The network management architecture for managing virtually any network type including TCP/IP
and other protocols (IPX, etc…). SNMP operates on top of the Internet Protocol (IP). The purpose of
SNMP is to flag failures, or error conditions with the Switch and/or Remote units and to automatically
notify the network administrator. Error conditions are sent as SNMP “traps”.
Trap: SNMP mechanism permitting a device to send an alarm to a management workstation.
MIB: The network administrator must load a MIB file (Management Information Base) to properly monitor
the PBXgateway Switch and remote units. This file contains numerous tables based on the MI Status
tables and provides information such as error counts, and the on/off status of both the Switch and
Remote units. (for reference see page D-223 MIB vs. Status Menu comparison)
The latest MIB files are available at www.MCK.com.
EXTender MIB files:
*.mib: This file contains necessary information for controlling the EXTenders.
HP® Openview (or equivalent)
A third party software package that must be installed and running on the network administrator’s
workstation to view and monitor all SNMP traps.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
222
MI Status Menu vs. MIB Group Table
MI Status Menu
MIB Group Table
(path: Switch->Status->WAN Stats)
Group Name:
extWANStatGroup
extWAN
extWANPortType
extWANPortState
extWANPortEnabled
extWANTxPackets
extWANTxBytes
extWANRxPackets
extWANRxBytes
extWANTxCTSLost
extWANTxUnderruns
extWANTxQueueBusy
extWANTxQueueBusyBytes
extWANTxPacketsQueued
extWANTxPacketsDequeued
extWANTxQueueFull
extWANTxFramingErr
extWANRxFramingErr
extWANRxParityErr
extWANRxCRCErr
extWANRxOverruns
extWANRxDCDLost
extWANmode
Table 36:
Status Menu vs. MIB Table
IMPORTANT:
This is an example of the MIB files internal group, in this case it is the extWANStatsgroup. This is an
internal table within the EXTender MIB file which accommodates every status entry for the Status menu
within the MI.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
223
Major Groups of the EXTender MIB
MIB Group
extSystemGroup
Management Interface (MI) Menu
Status->System->General Info
extInfoTable
Status->Connect->Connect Info
226
extStatisticsTable
Status->Connect->Connect Stats
227
extPortStatTable
Status->Port
228
extWANStatTable
Status->WAN->WAN Stats
229
extBandwidthUsageTable
Status->WAN->WAN Bandwidth
230
extDiagnosticTable
Status-> System->HW Diagnostics
230
extPortTable
Status->Port->Port Stats
231
extAlarmNotificationGrou
p
extSnmpControlGroup
The “LOG messages” that appear in the
LOG.
Configuration->IP
232
extTopologyGroup
extSuspendTable
extRVPDirectGroup
extRVPOverIPGroup
Table 37: MIB verses MI
Defines product relationships
Call Suspend information, if available.
Remote->Config->Connect->RVPDirect
Remote->Config->Connect->RVPoverIP
233
233
234
234
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
Page
225
232
224
MIB Group Tables
Group Name:
Description
extSystemGroup
extHardwareType
extSystemName
extSerialNumber
extTimeBooted
extIPAddress
extMACAddress
extRuntimeVersion
extPLDVersion
extSignalDSPVersion
extVoiceDSPVersion
extFlashVersion
extROMVersion
extHardwareVersion
extSerialPorts
extPhonePorts
extDRAM
extHeap
extFlash
extBandwidthAvailable
extDCESupportVersion
Table 38: extSystemGroup
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
Indicates if unit is “Switch (Gateway)” or “Remote”.
This is the name specified in the “Configuration->System”
menu.
Serial number of unit.
Time that the unit was last booted.
The IP address of the unit.
The MAC address of the unit.
The version of software that is running.
Version of PLD.
Version of Signal DSP.
Version of Voice DSP.
Version of FLASH.
Version of ROM.
Version of Hardware.
Number of serial ports.
Number of digital phone ports.
Size of DRAM.
Size of HEAP.
Size of FLASH.
The bandwidth available on WAN port.
Version of DCE Support.
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
225
Group Name:
Description
extInfoTable
extInfoPort
extInfoCurrentState
extInfoDuration
extInfoExtended
extInfoOffHook
extInfoVoice
extInfoSignalPort
extInfoVoicePort
extInfoLostSignal
extInfoV42Resync
extInfoV42FarResync
extInfoV42Retries
extInfoV42Timeouts
Table 39: extInfoTable
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
Ports 1-8.
State of port: UP, RD, NC, XX, VC, AN, CS
The duration in current state.
Indicates if port is extended.
Indicates ports offhook.
The compression algorithm used.
Connection method for Signal: WAN1, WAN2, IP
Connection method for Voice: WAN1, WAN2, IP
Amount of Lost Signal errors.
Number of V42 Resync errors.
Number of V42 FarResync errors.
Number of V42 Retry errors.
Number of V42 Timeout errors.
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
226
Group Name:
Description
extStatisticsTable
extStatConnectTries
extStatConnections
extStatByUser
extStatCarrierLost
extStatPortOffline
extStatPortInUse
extStatNoVoice
extStatBadPassword
extStatBlockedCalls
extStatLostSignalStat
extStatLostSigDisconnect
extStatLostSigReconnect
Table 40:
Amount of connect attempts.
Amount of successful connections.
Amount of Disconnects by User.
Amount of Disconnects from Lost Carrier.
Amount of Disconnects from port being offline.
Amount of Disconnects because port was in use.
Amount of Disconnects because there was no Voice Path
(no bandwidth).
Amount of Disconnects from wrong Password being
entered.
Number of Blocked Calls (no bandwidth).
Total Disconnects from Lost Signal
Number of Disconnections due to Lost Signal.
Number of Reconnections due to Lost Signals (only applies
to Call Suspend).
extStatisticsTable
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
227
Group Name:
Description
extPortStatTable
extPstatPercentVC
extPstatPercentUP
extPstatPercentRD
extPstatPercentNC
extPstatPercentXX
extPstatVCcount
extPstatVCaverage
extPstatUPcount
extPstatUPaverage
extPstatRDcount
extPstatRDaverage
Table 41: extPortStatTable
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
Percentage value of all call types that User/Port was on a
“VC” (Voice Call).
Percentage value of all call types that User/Port was “UP”
(connected).
Percentage value of all call types that User/Port was “RD”
(ReaDy).
Percentage value of all call types that User/Port was “NC”
(Not Connected).
Percentage value of all call types that User/Port was “XX”
(disabled).
Number of “Voice Calls” in minutes.
The average number of “Voice Calls”.
The number of minutes the User/Port has been “UP”.
The average number of minutes the Port has been “UP”.
The number of minutes the User/Port has been “RD”.
The average number of minutes the Port has been “RD”.
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
228
Group Name:
Description
extWANStatTable
extWAN
Shows WAN ports: WAN1, WAN2
extWANPortType
Shows WAN port type: Sync
extWANPortState
State of WAN port: UP, DN, INIT, CNCT
extWANPortEnabled
WAN enabled state: Enabled, Disabled.
extWANTxPackets
Number of Transmited packets.
extWANTxBytes
Number of Transmited bytes.
extWANRxPackets
Number of Received packets.
extWANRxBytes
Number of Received bytes.
extWANTxCTSLost
Number of times CTS signal was lost
extWANTxUnderruns
Number of times WAN Transmit buffer was empty.
extWANTxQueueBusy
Number of times Transmit queue was busy.
extWANTxQueueBusyB
Number of Transmit bytes queued.
ytes
extWANTxPacketsQueu Number of Transmit packets queued.
ed
extWANTxPacketsDequ
Number of Transmit bytes dequeued (lost).
eued
extWANTxQueueFull
Number of times the Transmit queue was full.
extWANTxFramingErr
Number of Transmit Framing errors.
extWANRxFramingErr
Number of Receive Framing errors.
extWANRxParityErr
Number of Receive parity errors.
extWANRxCRCErr
Number of Receive Cyclic Redundancy Check errors.
extWANRxOverruns
Number of times Receive buffer was full, and data had to be resent.
extWANRxDCDLost
Number of times Receive DCD signal was lost.
extWANRxQueueBusy
Number of times Receive queue was busy.
extWANRxNoBuffers
Number of times no Receive buffers available.
extWANRxTaskBusy
Number of times Receive capability was busy.
extWANRxApplBusy
Number of times Receive Applet was busy.
extWANRxErrors
Number of Receive errors.
extWANspeed
WAN port speed.
extWANmode
WAN mode setting: Sync
Table 42: extWANStatTable
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
229
Group Name:
Description
extBandwidthUsageTable
extBandwidthIndex
extBandwidthTime
extBandwidthSent
extBandwidthClipped
extBandwidthPercentage
Table 43:
Indicates the sample times: every hour
Time at which each sample occurred.
Bandwidth sent during sample period.
Bandwidth clipped during sample period.
The percentage of available bandwidth, equals (BW Sent /
BW Clipped).
extBandwidthUsageTable
Group Name:
Description
extDiagnosticsTable
extDiagTest
Names of Diagnostics tests.
extDiagResult
Results of Diagnostics tests.
Table 44:
extDiagnosticsTable
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
230
Group Name:
Description
extPortTable
extPtabPortID
extPtabEnabled
extPtabAutoConnect
extPtabBanner
extPtabDescription
extPtabUserID
extPtabLogout
extPtabVoiceMethod
extPtabVoicePath
extPtabVoiceCompanding
extPtabVoiceDTMF
extPtabVoiceSwitchEcho
extPtabVoiceRemoteEcho
extPtabVoiceSilenceDetection
extPtabVoicePacketTrace
extPtabVoiceJitterDelay
extPtabVoicePacketSize
Table 45:
The Port ID names.
The “Enabled” value in the Ports Default & 1-8 menus.
The “Auto connect” value in the Ports Default & 1-8 menus.
The “Banner” value in the Ports Default & 1-8 menus.
The “Description” value in the Ports 1-8 menus.
The “User ID” value in the Ports 1-8 menus.
The “Logout” value in the Ports 1-8 menus (Remote only).
The “Voice” value in the Ports Default & 1-8 menus (Switch
only).
The “Path” value in the Ports Default & 1-8 menus (Switch
only).
The “Companding” value in the Ports Default & 1-8 menus.
The “DTMF” value in the Ports Default & 1-8 menus.
The “Silence Detection” value in the Ports Default & 1-8
menus (Switch only).
The “Packet Trace” value in the Ports Default & 1-8 menus
(Switch only).
The “Jitter Delay” value in the Ports Default & 1-8 menus
(Switch only).
The “Packet Size” value in the Ports Default & 1-8 menus
(Switch only).
extPortTable
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
231
Group Name:
Description
extAlarmNotificationGroup
extAlarm
Table 46:
Log messages that appear in the Log file.
extAlarmNotificationGroup
Group Name:
Description
extSnmpControlGroup
extSnmpEnabled
extTrapPriority
extTrapHost1
extTrapHost2
Indicates SNMP is enabled.
Indicates the Priority setting for SNMP traps to be sent.
The IP address or HOST name to send first trap message.
The IP address or HOST name to send second trap
message.
extTrapHost3
The IP address or HOST name to send third trap message.
extTrapHost4
The IP address or HOST name to send fourth trap message.
extTrapHost5
The IP address or HOST name to send fifth trap message.
extTrapHost6
The IP address or HOST name to send sixth trap message.
extTrapHost7
The IP address or HOST name to send seventh trap
message.
extTrapHost8
The IP address or HOST name to send twelfth trap message.
extTrapPath
Path where traps are sent: WAN, LAN, BOTH
Table 47: extSnmpControlGroup
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
232
Group Name:
Description
extTopologyGroup
extTopType
extTopDevice1
extTopDevice2
extTopDevice3
extTopDevice4
extTopDevice5
extTopDevice6
extTopDevice7
extTopDevice8
Table 48: extTopologyGroup
The device type of the main unit: Switch, Remote
Device type connected to Port 1.
Device type connected to Port 2.
Device type connected to Port 3.
Device type connected to Port 4.
Device type connected to Port 5.
Device type connected to Port 6.
Device type connected to Port 7.
Device type connected to Port 8.
Group Name:
Description
extSuspendTable
extSuspendEnabled
extSuspendRvpMethod
extSuspendIpDestination
Indicates if Call Suspend is Enabled.
The IP address or HOST name to connect to, from Call
Suspend.
extSuspendRemLoginTimeout
extSuspendTimeout
extSuspendMode
extSuspendACDTone
Table 49:
Call Suspend timeout value.
Call Suspend mode used: Ring, Lamp
Indicates if ACD Tone is enabled for individual Port (Remote
only).
extSuspendTable
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
233
Group Name:
Description
extRvpDirectGroup
extRvpDirectPrimaryInterface
extRvpDirectPrimaryDialNum1
extRvpDirectPrimaryDialNum2
extRvpDirectSecondaryInterface
extRvpDirectSecondaryDialNum1
extRvpDirectSecondaryDialNum2
extRvpDirectUtilization
extRvpDirectDialback
Table 50: extRvpDirectGroup
Group Name:
The RVP_Direct Primary interface: WAN1, WAN2
The first Primary dial number.
The second Primary dial number.
The RVP_Direct Secondary interface: WAN1, WAN2
The first Secondary dial number.
The second Secondary dial number.
The RVP_Direct % utilization.
Indicates if Dialback is enabled over RVP_Direct.
Description
extRvpOverIpGroup
extRvpOverIpInterface
Table 51:
The IP destination address.
extRvpOverIPGroup
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
234
SNMP Setup
This Addendum covers information for installing all support software, accessing and identifying specific
trap information, viewing the “Alarm Log” and viewing the MIB.
Set up steps
1. Load a third party-network management software package, such as HP OpenView®, onto the PC
used to manage the PBXgateway Switch and Remote units.
Note: There are many applications that can be used to manage the SNMP parameters for the Switch
and Remote units.
2. Install the EXTender configuration files, available on MCKs web site (www.MCK.com), onto the same
PC mentioned in step 1.
3. Add the EXTender’s MIB to the third party-network management software package database. This
will allow the software to access the status and configuration variables of the EXTender.
4. Set the password (Community String) to allow access to the EXTender.
5. Format the Trap error messages from the EXTender into an easily read form.
6. Enable SNMP within the MI.
Install the EXTender MIB Files
The EXTender MIB files are necessary for the third party software to read the Remote unit status tables,
and to receive readable SNMP Trap error messages.
Note: This procedure assumes that a third party software package has been installed on a PC.
Copy the following files into the directories as specified below:
mibs\EXTenderxxxx.mib - (where xxxx refers to the EXTender release).
Copy to: c:\ov\mibs subdirectory
This file is the MIB for control of the EXTender. This file must be compiled into the third party software
package.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
235
Setting the Community Password
The EXTender comes with a default SNMP read password also known as a Community String. This
password must be specified inside the third party software to allow the user to view MIB objects.
Note: Before setting the password, the units must have an IP Address assigned by the network
administrator and must be part of the software “Network View”.
Procedure
1. Access the “Network View” menu from within the third party software. Click on the Icon of the device
to be configured.
Note: Each Icon should be titled with the IP Address for the device.
The default read (community) password is: public
2. Type in the password next to Community. Click OK.
Note: The Set Community password is not used by the EXTender and may be ignored.
Configuring the Trap Host
The EXTender will send alarm messages (SNMP Traps) to any Trap Host who’s IP Address has been
entered into one of the 12 slots provided in the User Interface SNMP Configuration Menu. These slots
are named Trap Host 1, Trap Host 2, etc.
Once an address has been entered into one of these slots, the EXTender will send Traps to that address.
See page 142, for information on setting the SNMP Trap Hosts.
Trap Customization
The third part software will receive and display Trap messages from the EXTender. But without some
configuration these messages will be a confusing list of numbers, as shown in Figure D.2.
Figure 96: Confusing Results from No Configuration
To display friendly and readable Trap messages, the software can be configured to display all the
information contained in the Trap Error messages sent by the EXTender.
Note: The Trap messages correlate with “log messages” within the MI. (see Appendix E for more
information on Log Messages).
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
236
Defining a Fatal Trap
Below is an example of setting up “HP Openview for Windows” to receive the Log messages from the
PBXgateway EXTender.
1. From within the third party software, navigate to the Add Trap window.
2. In the box Number: type: “1”
3. In box Name: type “EXTender Fatal Error”
4. In box Severity: select choice “Critical”
5. In box Description: type “$E, $1”
Note: Delete any existing text.
6. Click on the OK button.
Defining an Error Trap
1. From within the third party software, navigate to the Add Trap window.
2. In the box Number: type: “2”
3. In box Name: type “EXTender Error”
4. In box Severity: select choice “Major”
5. In box Description: type “$E, $1”
6. Click on the OK button.
Defining a Warning Trap
1. From within the third party software, navigate to the Add Trap window.
2. In the box Number: type: “3”
3. In box Name: type “EXTender Warning”
4. In box Severity: select choice “Warning”
5. In box Description: type “$E, $1”
6. Click on the OK button.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
237
Defining an Info Trap
1. From within the third party software, navigate to the Add Trap window.
2. In the box Number: type: “4”
3. In box Name: type “EXTender Info”
4. In box Severity: select choice “Informational”
5. In box Description: type “$E, $1”
6. Click on the OK button.
Viewing the Customized Alarm Log
1. Click the Alarm icon. The Following screen appears:
Figure 97: Customized Trap Messages
2. The Customized trap messages are color coded for identification purposes:
“Red” – Trap messages that are considered Major/Critical.
“Yellow” – Trap messages that are considered a “Warning”
“Purple” – Trap messages that are considered simply “Information”.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
238
Using SNMP to Monitor & Troubleshoot Problems
Below is an example of how to use SNMP management to monitor the PBXgateway EXTender.
Example: You have a PBXgateway EXTender with an IP address of “10.2.1.50”. The Remote Branch has
an IP address of “10.5.3.50”.
You want to monitor if there are lost signal conditions.
Use your SNMP manager to browse the “EXTender.mib” and create a TRAP condition on the object
name “extStatLostSignalStat”. Get the current threshold value, for example “0”. Trigger the TRAP on
when the threshold exceeds “0”.
If there is a Lost Signal condition, as shown in the Management Interface menu under “Status->Connect>Connect Stats”, or anything higher than zero, a message will be indicated on the SNMP manager.
You want to monitor if the CSU/DSU or ISDN Terminal Adapter is failing.
Use your SNMP manager to browse the “EXTender.mib”, for example, the Branch Office unit (IP address
“10.5.3.50”) and create a TRAP condition on the object name “extWANRxFramingErr”. Get the current
threshold value, for example “0” (should be zero). Trigger the TRAP on when the threshold exceeds “0”.
If the value exceeds zero, the ISDN line or Fractional T1 could be having problems. Investigate the
problem.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
239
This page is intentionally left blank.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
240
Appendix E: Log Messages
This Chapter provides information on Log Messages. A partial list is provided to define the log message,
provide an example for reference, and any required action that should be taken.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
242
Log Messages
Introduction
Each menu within the MI contains an area to display log messages that provide
detailed information on the status and condition of the unit. These messages
are grouped into four categories with each one detailing a specific functional
area of the EXTender operation.
Message
Categories
The Log Message categories are:
MGMT: These messages include information on configuration and diagnostic
conditions of the unit.
SYS: These messages include information on the operating system and utilities
related to the config files.
PORT: These messages include status information for all phone ports and
issues related to voice compression and connection details.
NET: These messages include status information for both WAN ports and
issues related to network connectivity.
Typical messa A typical log message is shown in the figure below.
Note: Every log message contains similar information to provide a date/time
stamp followed by a descriptive message.
Log Priority (See next
page)
Message Category
Log Message
Port # (if
applicable)
TIme
Date
Figure 98: Typical Log Message
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
243
Log Priorities
Log Priority
Fatal
Definition
Unit failed. Contact customer service.
Error
Unit failed but may recover. Try rebooting the unit.
Warning
Unexpected error but unit should still function.
Info
Routine event occurred.
Debug
Details on every event only seen with priority set to “Debug” or “Trace”.
Note: Debug messages are NOT included in the following list.
Trace
Details on each and every activity. Only seen with priority set to “Trace”.
Note: Trace messages are NOT included in the following list.
Table 52:
Log Priorities
Partial list of Log Messages
Notes: This list is sorted by: 1) Priority, 2) Category, and 3) Message
The ‘SNMP’ column identifies messages which are captured (YES or NO) with and SNMP Trap (see
Appendix ‘D’ for more info).
Priority
Category Message
Description/Action
SNMP
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
Administrator
password
changed
Console logout
Console upload
started
Console upload
succeeded
Flash
optimization
completed
Flash
optimization
started
IP test started,
sending 5
packets to
192.168.155.1
IP test complete:
round-trip (ms)
min/avg/max =
0/2/5
Completed test
on WAN 1
Resetting all
ports(1-8)
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
The administrator changed the
administrator password via the MI.
YES
The administrator has logged off the
console port.
The administrator began uploading a file
via the console port.
The file transfer on the console has
completed successfully
The administrator completed optimizing
the flash file system.
NO
The administrator began optimizing the
flash file system via the MI for better
performance.
IP test began sending the indicated
number of packets to the initiated IP
Address.
YES
IP test has finished with minimum,
average and maximum round-trip packet
delay (with a granularity of 5ms).
NO
Test WAN completed with no errors.
NO
The administrator reset all of the phone
ports.
YES
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
YES
YES
YES
NO
244
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
INFO
MGMT
Resetting Port 2 The administrator reset the indicated
phone port.
Resetting WAN 1 The administrator reset the indicated
WAN via the MI.
Rlogin logout
The administrator has logged out of the
Rlogin session.
Rlogin session 1 An incoming Rlogin connection was
connected from made.
192.168.155.1
Rlogin session 1 The Rlogin session was disconnected.
disconnected
Rlogin session 1 An outgoing Rlogin connection was
initiated from
made.
192.168.155.1
Starting test on Test WAN started.
WAN 1
Successful FTP The administrator has logged on via ftp.
login
Successful login The administrator has logged on via the
on the console
console port.
Successful
The administrator has logged in via
Rlogin login
Rlogin (Remote/Switch Login)
Successful
The administrator has logged on via
Telnet login
telnet.
Telnet 2
An incoming Telnet connection was
connected from made.
192.168.155.1
Telnet 2
The telnet session was disconnected.
disconnected
from
192.168.155.1
Telnet logout
The administrator has logged out via
telnet.
The system clock The administrator set the system time.
has been
updated
The system
The administrator changed and saved the
configuration has system configuration.
changed
The system
The administrator changed and saved the
configuration has system configuration and requires a
changed and
reboot to take effect.
requires a reboot
The system
The administrator changed and saved the
configuration has system configuration and requires a WAN
changed and
port to be reset to take effect.
requires a WAN
reset
The system
The systems stats have been reset, and
statistics have
requires a reboot to take effect.
been reset.
WAN 1 sent 20 Test WAN completed. The number of
(10 byte)
packets sent, received average round trip
packets,
time, and the size of the packet is
received 20. Avg displayed.
time: 11(msec)
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
245
Priority
Category
Message
WARNING MGMT
Console upload
failed
The file transfer on the console has failed.
Check to make sure the baud rates on
Branch/Terminal Application are the
same. Verify attempting to transfer a .m*t
file.
Failed login on
There was a failed administrator login
the console
attempt on the console (invalid
user/password combination)
Failed Rlogin
There was a failed administrator login
login
attempt via Rlogin (invalid user/password
combination)
Failed Telnet
There was a failed administrator login
login
attempt via telnet (invalid user/password
combination)
SNMP: I/O
The unit was unable to send an SNMP
Warning Trap I/O Trap over IP
Write, failed.
Failed FTP login There was a failed FTP login attempt
(invalid user/password combination).
Message
Description/Action
WARNING MGMT
WARNING MGMT
WARNING MGMT
WARNING MGMT
WARNING MGMT
Priority
Category
WARNING MGMT
SNMP: Process
Trap Packet
build, failed.
Successful FTP
login
Unable to test
WAN 1, ports are
in use
WARNING MGMT
WARNING MGMT
WARNING MGMT
ERROR
MGMT
ERROR
MGMT
ERROR
MGMT
ERROR
MGMT
ERROR
MGMT
Description/Action
SNMP
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
SNMP
The unit was unable to send an SNMP
Trap because it had a problem building
the Trap message.
The administrator logged in via FTP to
transfer files.
The administrator attempted to Test WAN
while phone ports are in use.
Need to ensure the phone ports are not in
use to ensure voice quality.
WEB: File I/O
The unit was unable to open or create a
Error:
file on the flash file system or ramdisk,
/flash0/default.m which the Web server requires.
6b, open.
Password is
The stored password was corrupted.
corrupt - access Contact tech support.
denied
YES
SNMP: I/O Error
proxy I/O Write,
failed.
WAN 1 test
failed: Network
Error
WEB: File I/O
Error:
int_msg.txt,
open.
YES
An attempt failed to send an SNMP Trap
across a WAN link via a SNMP proxy.
YES
NO
YES
YES
Test WAN failed due to a network error. NO
Check WAN configuration, DSU/CSU
configuration and cabling.
An error occurred while the web server
YES
was trying to perform a file I/O operation
(such as open, read, write, or rename) on
the specified file. This may prevent the
web server from launching.
WEB: Process
An error occurred during initialization of
YES
Error: Init. OCB, the unit, which prevents it from launching
unable launch
the Web server.
HTTP server.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
246
Appendix F: ConneX Application Guide
Use this Appendix to help you get your ConneX phone up and running. Quick Setup steps, as well as key
presses and screen displays are included to help you with your ConneX application.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
248
Personal ConneX Information
IMPORTANT: The terms RemoteConneX and MobileConneX will be referred to as ConneX, unless
otherwise noted in this document.
This guide was prepared for:
________________________________________________
(A) What number will I dial to access the ConneX PBXgateway?
__________________________________________________
(B) What extension will I dial to access my corporate voicemail?
__________________________________________________
(C) What is my password?
__________________________________________________
(D) Do I have to program my own dialback number?
Yes _____
No _____
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
249
Using ConneX
The following pages provide step-by-step instructions for programming and operating your mobile phone
when enabled with the ConneX Application.
What is the ConneX Application?
The ConneX application is supported on the ConneX™ PBXgateway™. This application puts PBX
features and dialtone in your hands when using a mobile phone. The ConneX application is especially
attractive to mobile workers because they can receive calls and access the corporate PBX system and
commonly used voice applications from anywhere. PBX applications that are accessible through your
mobile phone include: internal dialing, hold, transfer, conferencing and dialtone. ConneX provides
survivability as well, in cases where your digital desk set goes down, you are still able to receive calls on
your mobile phone.
Why Use the ConneX Application?
The two main reasons why we recommend you use the ConneX application on your mobile phone are:
a) you can receive your office-bound calls anywhere at anytime;
b) you can leverage the corporate PBX for long-distance and/or international calls.
c) access to PBX features such as conference, transfer and 4-digit dialing.
Your mobile phone connected to the ConneX PBXgateway can be used as your business phone,
resulting in significant cost savings for your company, or as a supplement to your office phone. If you
spend little time at the office, there is no need to have and maintain a digital set. With the ConneX
application you can receive calls and access most-commonly used PBX features and dialtone from
anywhere using your mobile phone.
How Does the ConneX Application Work?
For you to receive calls anywhere, you must enable the ConneX application on your mobile phone. On
the surface, your mobile phone appears to be a portable extension of your office phone because both
devices will ring when a call comes in, if you choose to use both phones. But in reality, the ConneX
application gives your mobile phone access to PBX voice applications once limited only to your digital
deskset. Now, how does it really work?
Let’s say Jane wants to use the ConneX application on her mobile phone. This is as easy as 1…2…3!
1. The PBX System Administrator (SA) assigns a port on the ConneX PBXgateway for Jane.
2. Jane* (or the SA**) enters her mobile phone number as an authorized number to which the gateway
routes calls (a.k.a. dialback number) either from the Admin Menu on the ConneX phone or through
the Interactive Voice Response (IVR) system from the mobile phone*.
3. Jane now can use the ConneX application on her mobile phone. She can take calls from anywhere
and access critical PBX-supported voice applications (i.e. conferencing, internal dialing) through her
mobile phone.
* When operation mode is set to Roaming.
** When operation mode is set to Fixed or Fixed/Forced
Technically speaking, incoming calls are processed by the PBX and the ConneX PBXgateway
simultaneously. The PBX routes the call to Jane’s office extension while the ConneX PBXgateway places
an outbound call to her mobile phone. If Jane accepts the call, the gateway completes the connection
(see call path on the diagram on the next page).
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
250
Call routed to cell phone
PSTN & Wireless
Incoming call
Any touch-tone phone
PBX
Mobile Worker
Corporate Office
SD
Sample of Commands:
Telephone
Off hook: press ***
Hold: press ##H
Transfer: ##T
Conference: Press ##C
Console
WAN
PW R 1
2
Port Status
3
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
S W I T C H UNIT
PBXgateway ™
ConneX PBXgateway
Figure 99: ConneX
Example: Jane’s mobile phone rings. Jane is required to press any key on her mobile phone’s dial pad to
accept the call and to prevent the call from going into her corporate voicemail. After she accepts the call,
she is able to talk to the caller, place the call on hold, transfer the call or set up a conference call as if she
were using her office phone. (See the ConneX Commands starting on page 255 to learn which keys to
press to imitate digital handset push buttons). If Jane chooses not to accept the call, the call is forwarded
to her corporate phone voicemail.
When Jane wants to bypass long-distance toll charges, she dials into the ConneX PBXgateway using the
number provided by the System Administrator to get PBX dialtone. Once she has accessed the dialtone
she can place calls through the PBX system. As a System Administrator, ensure each person has a
unique DN to access the PBX dialtone to prevent problems when two users dial into the PBX at the same
time.
Programming Your Mobile Phone
This section includes detailed information on the configurable operation modes, set up instructions and
overall operation of your mobile phone when enabled with the ConneX application.
Alert: Before getting started, make sure your phone is setup to access automated calling systems like
voicemail and Interactive Voice Response (IVR) (i.e.: Motorola TDMA digital StarTAC™ phone users, for
example, must turn Scratchpad Tones ON). The ConneX application includes an IVR system thus
requiring your phone to be properly configured. Consult your phone's manual for specific instructions.
DEFINITIONS
Dialback Mode: A configurable setting that determines where the ConneX PBXgateway routes your calls.
There are four different operation modes and the level of security varies from one to another. The SA is
the only person who can change the operation mode. See information on each of the modes for more
details.
Dialback Number (DN): The telephone number that the ConneX PBXgateway uses to reach you on your
mobile phone. Incoming calls to your office extension are routed to the dialback number that is currently
set.
Note: Dialback number must include prefix (9+1 e.g.) necessary to access outside line.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
251
Operation Modes
Roaming
This mode allows you to program/modify the Dialback Number (DN) only via the IVR system. The DN is
automatically saved in the ConneX PBXgateway. You can change the DN anytime via the IVR system.
The DN is your mobile phone number. When you ENABLE your mobile phone in this dialback mode, all
office-bound calls will be routed to that device for as long as it is turned on. Unanswered calls are routed
to your office voicemail.
Fixed
This mode requires the SA to program a permanent Dialback Number (DN) in the ConneX PBXgateway.
In Fixed mode, you cannot modify the DN via the IVR system. When you ENABLE your mobile phone in
this dialback mode, all office-bound calls will be routed to that device for as long as it is turned on.
Unanswered calls are routed to your office voicemail. In this mode, the ConneX PBXgateway will
authenticate Jane via her port password (if assigned) and the DN (her mobile phone number). Once the
ConneX PBXgateway confirms that Jane is an authorized user, it will call her mobile phone back to
connect her to the PBX. The user is not prompted to press the PBX key to accept the call.
Security precautions prevent unauthorized access to the PBX system: Configure Jane’s port to Fixed or
Fixed/Forced modes.
Fixed/Forced
This mode requires the SA to program a permanent Dialback Number (DN) in the ConneX PBXgateway.
In Fixed/Forced mode, you cannot modify the DN via the IVR system. This mode is the most secure of all
four modes because it requires the ConneX PBXgateway to call the pre-assigned DN back to allow
access to PBX dialtone and features. When you ENABLE your mobile phone in this dialback mode, all
office-bound calls will be routed to that device for as long as it is turned on. Unanswered calls are routed
to your office voicemail. In this mode, the ConneX PBXgateway will authenticate Jane via her port
password (if assigned) and the DN (her mobile phone number). Once the ConneX PBXgateway confirms
that Jane is an authorized user, it will call her mobile phone back to connect her to the PBX.
Disabled
This mode allows you to call into the central voice system (a.k.a. PBX) to get dialtone to place outgoing
calls to anywhere in the world. In this mode, incoming calls are NOT routed to your mobile phone. While
connected to the corporate PBX, you can transfer calls to another 4- or 5-digit internal extension or to an
external number (if supported by your company’s PBX); set up conference calls (up to 3 numbers); and
place calls on hold as if you were using a digital phone set.
Operating Your Mobile Phone
After your organization’s System Administrator configures the PBX and the ConneX PBXgateway to
support your mobile phone, the System Administrator will provide you with a number to call in to ENABLE
or DISABLE the ConneX application at your convenience. The same number is used to access PBX
dialtone and features.
ENABLE the ConneX Application on Your Mobile Phone for the First Time
1. Call the number provided by the System Administrator to ENABLE the application on your mobile
phone. You will hear “Welcome to ConneX.” The message you will hear will depend on the mobile
phone type being used. ADSI phone users will here “Welcome to RemoteConneX” non ADSI phone
users will hear “Welcome to MobileConneX”.
2. Press ## 0 (zero) to ENABLE the application. When you hear “Mobile/Remote ConneX enabled”, you
have completed the task.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
252
Assign/Change Your Password
The user password is an optional feature of the ConneX application. However, we highly recommend that
you assign a password to prevent unauthorized access to the corporate PBX. The SA may assign a
password for you. You can change that password at anytime via the IVR system.
1. Call the number provided by the SA to access the corporate PBX.
2. Press ### to access the IVR system and follow prompts. NOTE: The password can be a combination
of numbers and letters, up to 10 digits.
DISABLE/ RE-ENABLE the ConneX Application on Your Mobile Phone
1. Call the number provided by the SA to ENABLE the application on your mobile phone. You will hear
“Welcome to Mobile/Remote ConneX” and be prompted to enter a password followed by the # key, if
a password has been assigned. You may change your password at any time via the IVR system.
2. Press ## 0 (zero) to DISABLE the ConneX application. When you hear “ConneX disabled”, you’ve
completed the task. End the call.
3. To RE-ENABLE, call the same number provided by the SA to ENABLE the ConneX application.
4. Press ## 0 (zero) to ENABLE. When you hear “ConneX enabled”, you’ve completed the task.
5. End the call.
Set/ Modify the Dialback Number (Roaming Mode ONLY)
1. Call the number provided by the SA to access the PBX.
2. You will hear “Welcome to Mobile/Remote ConneX” and be prompted to enter a password followed
by the # key, if a password has been assigned. You may change your password at any time via the
IVR system.
3. Press ### to access the IVR system to modify the Dialback Number (DN) and follow prompts. When
entering the DN, add all prefixes required for the PBX to place an outbound call. For example, if you
normally dial 9 1 + the phone number to reach someone outside of the organization, these prefixes
must be entered in the DN. An asterix (*) can be used to enter a pause in a dialstring, if required.
Access corporate PBX dialtone (Roaming, Fixed and Disabled Modes)
1. Call the number provided by the SA to access the PBX.
2. You will hear “Welcome to Mobile/Remote ConneX” and be prompted to enter a password followed
by the # key, if a password has been assigned. You may change your password at any time via the
IVR system.
3. Press * * * to get a dialtone.
4. Dial the desired phone number. When placing calls through the PBX, remember to add all prefixes
required for the PBX to place an outbound call (i.e. 9,1).
5. If you want to place multiple calls while connected to the PBX, hang up or release first call and press
* * * to get dialtone to make the next call. You will hear dialtone again. You can place as many calls
as needed. While connected to the PBX, you will be able to transfer your calls to another 4- or 5-digit
internal extension or to an external number (if supported by your organization’s PBX) by pressing
##T; set up conference calls by pressing ##C; and place calls on hold by pressing ##H as if you were
using a digital phone set.
6. While on a call, a short tone will alert you of another incoming call. Press * * * to put the first call on
hold and answer the second call. Press * * * to return to first call or switch between calls. See the
ConneX Commands section starting on page 255, for the complete list of features supported.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
253
Access PBX dialtone (Fixed/Forced Mode ONLY)
1. Call the number provided to you by the SA to access the PBX.
2. You will hear “Welcome to Remote/Mobile ConneX” and be prompted to enter a password followed
by the # key, if a password has been setup. You may change your password at any time via the IVR
system.
3. You will hear “Starting Dialback” and will be asked to disconnect.
4. End the call.
5. Your mobile phone will ring and you will be asked to press any key to accept the call. You are now
connected to the central PBX.
6. Press *** to get PBX dialtone. When you hear dialtone, dial the desired phone number. When placing
calls through the PBX, remember to add all prefixes required for the PBX to place an outbound call
(i.e. 9,1).
7. If you want to place multiple calls while connected to the PBX, hang up or release first call and press
* * * to get dialtone to make the next call. You will hear a dialtone again. You can place as many calls
as needed. While connected to the PBX, you will be able to transfer your calls to another 4- or 5-digit
internal extension or to an external number (if supported by your organization’s PBX) by pressing
##T; set up conference calls by pressing ##C; and place calls on hold by pressing ##H as if you were
using a digital phone set.
8. While on a call, a short tone will alert you of another incoming call. Press * * * to put the first call on
hold and answer the second call. Press * * * to return to first call or switch between calls. See ConneX
Commands section on the following page for the complete list of features supported.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
254
ConneX Mobile Application Commands - DEFINITY
The following table lists the DEFINITY MobileConneX application commands and corresponding actions:
Action
Commands
Off Hook (get PBX dialtone)
Note: this accesses the first unlit button. If
not a line key, user must press **key
Call the PBX → Press * * * → wait for dialtone
Hook Flash (to answer another call or
switch between calls). A short tone will
indicate another incoming call
Access a specific feature/line key.
These are pre-programmed for the
user’s extension on the PBX
Put call on Hold
Hang Up Call
Drop a call
Set up a conference call
Press * * * to answer second call → press *** again to return
to first call
Transfer a call
Enable/Disable ConneX application1
Access Interactive Voice Response
(IVR) System2
Check Voicemail Status
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Press * * key to access the feature. Use 1 for a, 2 for b, 3 for
c, etc … use 0 for j
Press # # H → follow prompts to take call off hold.
Press # # O (letter)
Press # # D → you will hear dial tone after caller is released
Press # # C → hear dialtone → dial number to conference
→ press # # C to add attendee
Press # # T → hear dialtone → dial extension → press # # T
again to transfer call
Call the PBX → Press # # 0 (zero) → follow prompts
Press # # # → follow prompts
Press # # 1→ follow prompts
Press # # 9 when on an active call to enable DND (Do Not
Disturb). If not on an active call use the DND softkey.
Reset the ConneX Session on the port.
Press # # 5→ follow prompts
Tip:
Press the keys (i.e. ## T) at a consistent pace to envoke the PBX feature “transfer”. The other
party will hear the key presses.
1
You control when incoming calls are directed to your mobile phone depending on your needs.
2
You can use the IVR system to setup password and dialback number or test dialback number if mode is
set to Roaming.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
255
ConneX Mobile Application Commands - Meridian
The following table lists the Meridian MobileConneX application commands and corresponding actions:
Action
Commands
Off Hook (get PBX dialtone)
Note: this accesses the first unlit button. If
not a line key, user must press **key
Call the PBX → Press * * * → wait for dialtone
Hook Flash (to answer another call or
switch between calls). A short tone will
indicate another incoming call
Access a specific feature/line key.
These are pre-programmed for the
user’s extension on the PBX
Put call on Hold
Release Call
Set up a conference call
Press * * * to answer second call → press *** again to return
to first call
Transfer a call
Enable/Disable ConneX application1
Access Interactive Voice Response
(IVR) System2
Check Voicemail Status
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Press * * key to access the feature. Use 1 for a, 2 for b, 3 for
c, etc … use 0 for j
Press # # H → follow prompts to take call off hold.
Press # # R → caller is released
Press # # C → hear dialtone → dial number to conference
→ press # # C to add attendee
Press # # T → hear dialtone → dial extension → press # # T
again to transfer call
Call the PBX → Press # # 0 (zero) → follow prompts
Press # # # → follow prompts
Press # # 1→ follow prompts
Press # # 9 when on an active call to enable DND (Do Not
Disturb). If not on an active call use the DND softkey.
Reset the ConneX Session on the port.
Press # # 5→ follow prompts
Tip:
Press the keys (i.e. ## T) at a consistent pace to evoke the PBX feature “transfer”. The other
party will hear the key presses.
1
You control when incoming calls are directed to your mobile phone depending on your needs.
2
You can use the IVR system to setup password and dialback number or test dialback number if mode is
set to Roaming.
Labels with the ConneX mobile commands are shipped with each ConneX PBXgateway. Need more
labels for free? Please, call 1-888-459-7979.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
256
ConneX Mobile Application Commands - Norstar
When using a Norstar digital set, select Feature 808 to invoke “Long Tones” after logging into the IVR.
This will enable the phone to see all other subsequent phone commands.
The following table lists the Norstar MobileConneX application commands and corresponding actions:
Action
Off Hook (get KSU dialtone)
Note: This accesses the first unlit
button. If not a line key, user must press
**key.
Hook Flash (to answer another call or
switch between calls). A short tone will
indicate another incoming call
Access a specific feature/line key.
These are pre-programmed for the
user’s extension on the PBX
Put call on Hold
Hang Up/Release Call
Set up a conference call
Transfer a call
Enable/Disable ConneX application 1
Access Interactive Voice Response
(IVR) System 2
Check Voicemail Status
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Reset the ConneX Session on the port.
Commands
Call the KSU → Press * * * → wait for dialtone
Press * * * to answer second call → press *** again to return
to first call
Press * * key to access the feature. Use 1 for a, 2 for b, 3 for
c, etc … use 0 for j
Press # # H → follow prompts to take call off hold.
Press # # O → caller is released
Press # # H → hear dialtone → Press * * key number for
next line→ hear dialtone → dial DN of attendee → press # #
C to add attendee.
Press # # T → hear dialtone → dial extension → press # # O
again to transfer call
Call the KSU → Press # # 0 (zero) → follow prompts
Press # # # → follow prompts
Press # # 1→ follow prompts
Press # # 9 when on an active call to enable DND (Do Not
Disturb). If not on an active call use the DND softkey.
Press # # 5→ follow prompts
1
You control when incoming calls are directed to your mobile phone depending on your needs.
You can use the IVR system to setup password and dialback number or test dialback number if mode is
set to Roaming.
2
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
257
Getting Started on a RemoteConneX Phone
Congratulations on your purchase of the RemoteConneXTM Phone. This Quick Reference Guide will
assist you when using the office functionality of your phone.
Important: In order to use the RemoteConneX Phone, you must perform the first use setup procedure
outlined in the RemoteConneX Phone User Guide!
The login Procedure
1. Raise the handset, or press the Speaker key. The following menu will appear:
Timer: 00:03
RemoteConneX
Flash
Login
Reset
2. Press the Login Softkey.
3. When prompted to enter your password, enter the password and press the OK softkey. If you do not
know your password, refer to the ‘Personal RemoteConneX Info’ section or contact your System
Administrator. A password is optional but highly recommended.
4. You are now logged into the system and should be able to see the PBX: Idle Menu.
There are two methods to use your phone for office functionality:
•
Logging in and staying connected at all times.
•
Not logging in and using Dialback functionality to make/ receive office calls.
Dialback Instructions
The Dialback number is the telephone number that the ConneX PBXgateway uses to reach you at your
home location. Incoming calls to your office extension are routed to the Dialback number currently set.
Refer to the ‘Personal RemoteConneX Info’ section to find out if you need to set your own Dialback
number.
Dialback Setup Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
From the PBX: Idle menu, press the Admin softkey.
Press the SetDB softkey.
Enter your 10-digit phone number as if you were sitting at your office attempting to call home. Include any prefix
numbers such as ‘9’ or ‘1’ (i.e 9-1-xxx-xxx-xxxx) when setting the number.
Press the Enter softkey to store.
Press the CheckDB softkey to replay.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
258
Feature Softkeys
Once logged into the system, the following menu will appear:
Timer: 00:07
PBX: Idle
Next
Flash
Line 1
VMail
DND
Next LN
Line 1
DND
Flash
VMail
VMLogin
VMStat
Admin
Dialback
SetDB
Check DB
Passwd
On/Off
Admin
Cycles through the pool of available lines to answer/retrieve office calls.
Selects the first line appearance for use.
Disables Incoming Call notification. If on an active call (DND softkey not available) press
##9. This feature will be retained for the entire connect session; there would be no
indication on the phone.
Performs a hook flash with home phone line. See the ‘Answering an Incoming Home Call.’
section for more info.
Allows access to the following voice mail features:
Initiate a login to the corporate voicemail system.
Relays audible status of your voice maibox - “You’ve got voicemail!”
Allows access to the following administrative features:
Dials the dialback number currently set. Press PBX softkey to answer call.
Set the Dialback number.
Replays the current Dialback number.
Sets the password.
Enable/Disable dialback.
Making and Answering a Call
Placing an Office Call
1.
2.
Press the Line 1 or Next LN softkeys to draw a dialtone. You will enter the PBX: Active Call menu.
Dial the phone number of the desired party. Remember that this IS your office phone so you must dial any prefixes needed to make a call from your office (i.e ‘9’).
Ending an Office Call
1.
2.
Press the HangUp softkey.
If using the handset, press the Speaker key before hanging up the handset to keep your RemoteConneX session
active. You will return to the PBX: Idle menu.
Answering an Incoming Office Call...
...At the PBX: Idle Menu
1.
2.
You will hear a voice prompt indicating an incoming call.
Press the Next LN softkey to answer the call.
...At the PBX: Active Call Menu
1.
2.
3.
Your will hear a stutter tone.
Press the Next LN softkey to answer the incoming call. Your current call will be placed on hold.
When completed, press the Next LN softkey again to retrieve the call that was placed on hold.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
259
Answering an Incoming Home Call...
(Call Waiting must be enabled on this home line)
...At the PBX: Idle Menu
1.
2.
3.
You will hear a standard call waiting tone.
Press the Flash softkey to answer the call.
When completed, press the Flash softkey again to return to PBX: Idle menu.
...At the PBX: Active Call Menu
1.
2.
3.
4.
You will hear a standard call waiting tone.
Press the Flash softkey to answer the incoming call. Your current office call will be placed on hold.
When completed, press the Flash softkey again to return to the PBX: Idle menu.
Press the Next LN softkey to retrieve the office call that was placed on hold.
Using Active Call Commands – Remote ConneX
Conference (Conf)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the Conf softkey.
Dial the extension of the party.
Press the Conf softkey.
Return to Step 1 to add other parties as needed.
(Norstar) Conference (Conf)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the Conf softkey.
Press Next LN to access another line.
Dial the extension of the party.
Press the Conf softkey.
Return to Step 1 to add other parties as needed.
Transfer (Xfer)
1.
2.
3.
Press the Xfer softkey.
Dial the extension of the party.
Press the Xfer softkey to complete the transfer.
(Norstar) Transfer (Xfer)
1.
While on an active call, press the Xfer softkey.
2. Dial the extension of the party.
3. Press the Hang up softkey (Rel Key can also be used). Your transfer is complete and your initial login screen will
be displayed. If you are using Norstar PBX, pressing the Xfer softkey will disconnect the call.
Hold
1.
2.
3.
Press the Hold softkey to place an active call on hold.
To retrieve the “on hold” call, press the Next LN softkey (to cycle through the available lines).
To place another call while the first call is on hold press Line 1.
Drop a Call (Drop) (Used with DEFINITYTM ONLY)
“Drops” the current call but does not hang up the line;
“Drops” the last person joined to a conference call.
1. Press the Drop softkey.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
260
Hang Up (HangUp)
Hangs up the active call, but keeps the RemoteConneX session active. This softkey will also act like the
“Release” key of a Nortel Meridian phoneset.
1.
2.
Press the HangUp softkey
If using the handset, press the Speaker key freeing up the handset.
PBX:Admin Menu
Timer: 00:07
PBX: Admin
Dialbck
Passwd
SetDB
ON/OFF
Check DB
Exit
Dialback
1.
2.
Press the Dialbck softkey. This confirms dialback number has been set.
Press SetDB. Enables dialback.
3. Press Check DB. Recites the entered DB number.
PBX:Voice Mail Menu
This menu is displayed during the phoneset ConneX software download, when the Voicemail password
screen is skipped.
Timer: 00:07
PBX: Admin
VM Login
Exit
VM Stat
Voice Mail
1.
2.
Press the VM Login softkey. You will be prompted to enter a password.
Press VM Stats. Old and New messages are displayed.
Using Active Call Commands – Mobile ConneX
Conference (Conf)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press # # C to place existing call on hold.
Press * * * for next line.
Dial new DN.
press # # C to add attendee
(Norstar) Conference (Conf)
1.
2.
3.
5.
Press ##H to place existing call on hold.
Press * *Key Num (## followed by any key number) for next line.
Dial new DN.
When the new call is active, press # # C.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
261
Transfer (Xfer)
1.
Press the # # T when on an existing call.
2. At dialtone dial new DN.
3. Press # # T to transfer call.
(Norstar) Transfer (Xfer)
1.
Press the # # T when on an existing call.
2. At dialtone dial new DN.
3. Press # # O to transfer call.
Hold
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Press # # H to place an active call on hold.
Follow prompt to take call off Hold (* *key Num)
To retrieve the call on Hold press ##1.
To place another call while the first call is on hold, press ## Key Num (## followed by any key number) to access
another line and place your call.
To retrieve the first call you put on hold while you make the second call press ##1.
(Norstar) Hold
1.
2.
Press # # H to place an active call on hold.
Follow prompt to take call off Hold (* *key Num)
Drop a Call (Drop) (Used with DEFINITYTM ONLY)
“Drops” the current call but does not hang up the line;
“Drops” the last person joined to a conference call.
1. Press the Drop softkey.
Hang Up (HangUp)
Hangs up the active call, but keeps the MobileConneX session active. This softkey will also act like the
“Release” key of a Nortel Meridian phoneset.
1.
2.
Meridian ##R or Release Key
Definity - ##O
Dialback
1.
Press ### to access the IVR and follow the prompts. If you wish to verify your Dialback Number select option 4.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
262
Appendix G: PBX/KSU ConneX Configuration
The following KSU/PBX configurations enable basic ConneX functionality on the PBXgateway.
Two basic configurations are described:
•
a standard ConneX configuration with no digital sets and one remote client,
•
a Bridged or Ghost configuration where the ConneX client acts as a ghost set receiving calls
targeted to an actual desk set (either extended from a Remote Extender or directly connected to
the KSU).
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
263
Norstar KSU ConneX Configuration
This section illustrates two variations of Norstar KSU settings to enable ConneX functionality on the
PBXgateway for the two basic ConneX configurations;
1. Line Assignment Method - ConneX configuration with no digital set and one remote client,
2. ConneX Session Port - Bridged or Ghost configuration where the ConneX client acts as a ghost
set receiving calls targeted to an actual desk set (either extended from a Remote Extender or
directly connected to the KSU).
Notes:
•
The configurations assume that proper call routing has been configured in the KSU, and the
PBXgateway has been properly programmed for ConneX.
•
Consult the appropriate Norstar documentation for setting locations and variations to the settings
listed below (may change depending on KSU).
•
Caller ID settings are not included. See the appropriate Norstar documentation for the proper
Caller ID settings available on the system the PBXgateway unit is to be connected to.
Voice Mail
If Voice Mail is to be used then the appropriate Norstar Voice Mail setup is required on the desired port. If
configuring without a desk set then the mailbox will be programmed for the ConneX_Session port, if a
bridged configuration, then all Voice Mail settings as well as the mailbox will be programmed on the digital
desk set. See the appropriate Norstar Voice Mail documentation for configuration.
It should be noted that a delay of 1 to 2 rings occurs when the KSU indicates ringing and the remote set
starts ringing. This requires the Ring Count setting in the Gateway to be at least one greater then the
number of rings set in the KSU before the call is forwarded to Voice Mail. Third party Voice Mail (Cellular
company, etc.) forward settings should be at least one ring greater then the Norstar settings to prevent
ConneX messages from being forwarded to the third party system
KSU Configuration – Line Assignment Method
Link Port
The Link Port is restricted to one Intercom Key assignment and no line appearances to ensure correct
operation. If the user is required to login via the link from an external set either Direct Ring Transfer of a
Target Line to the port should be used. The link can also be reached externally via a call to the Company
Directory if an Automated Attendant is configured. The user can login internally via the port DN at any
time.
Terminals and Sets
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enable Line Pool Access for outbound dialing (PRI or Pool).
Set Prime Line to I/C, with a minimum or 1 I/Cs assigned.
Set Answer DN to None.
Set Foreward on No Answer and Forward on Busy to None.
Set Do Not Disturb on Busy to N.
Set Handsfree to None.
Set Allow Redirect to Y and Redirect Ring to Y.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
264
Lines
Settings here are used for inbound external calling to login to the IVR utilizing calls with KSU functionality
or set administration. The line type will be dictated by the lines/trunks connected to the KSU. The
following example is for a PRI trunk connected to card PRI-A in the KSU.
The following example is for a PRI trunk connected to card PRI-A in the KSU.
1. Under the Target Line assigned in Terminals and Sets, set the line to Public.
2. Set Received Number/Digits to a number in the range included in the PRI trunk.
3. Set If Busy to Prime and Prime Set to the DN of the set configured in Terminals and Sets. Ensure that
you enter a unique DN for each ConneX user. Duplicating this number will cause problems when two
or more users assigned the same DN attempt to login to ConneX simultaneously.
4. In System Programming set DRT to Prime to Y (system-wide setting).
KSU Configuration - ConneX_Session Port
When configuring the ConneX_Session port for inbound external calling note that if line assignments are
used the ConneX Line Keys assigned in the Gateway MI will be 0, 1, 2, and 7 (where 0,1 and 2
correspond to a setting of 3 IC keys and 7 corresponds to the assigned line as the port will default to a
M7208 set). If DRT to Prime is used then the ConneX Line Keys will be 0, 1 and 2 (corresponds to a
setting of 3 IC keys). As with the Link, an Auto-Attendant may also be used to reach the ConneX_Session
from an external caller if no outside lines are available for individual ports.
Stand Alone Configuration – No Desk Set (Bridged Appearance)
The following configuration has no digital sets attached to the ConneX_Session port, although a digital
set may be connected to a Extender 6000 corresponding to the ConneX_Session port (i.e. if port 1 on the
Gateway is the ConneX_Session then a digital set may be extended on port 1 of the Extender 6000). If
the digital set is extended, calls will not be forwarded to the remote user but will ring at the digital set
instead. It is recommended that a M7208 digital set be used in this situation to avoid possible set
recognition issues when ConneX is re-enabled.
Consult the appropriate Norstar documentation for setting locations and variations to the settings listed
below. Note, that settings may vary with different KSUs.
In this configuration only the Remote phone will ring.
Terminals and Sets
1. Assign a Target line to Appear and Ring, one appearance. Line Appearance method only.
2. Enable Line Pool Access for outbound dialing.
3. Set Prime Line to I/C, with a minimum or 3 I/Cs assigned.
4. Set Answer DN to None.
5. Set Foreward on No Answer and Forward on Busy to None or to the appropriate System Voice Mail
DN if applicable (mailbox creation required).
6. Set Do Not Disturb on Busy to N.
7. Set Handsfree to None (allows for calls on Line 1 - **1, etc.).
8. Set Allow Redirect to Y and Redirect Ring to Y.
Lines
1. Under the Target Line assigned in Terminals and Sets, set the line to Public.
2. Set Received Number/Digits to a number in the range included in the PRI trunk.
3. Set If Busy to Prime and Prime Set to the DN of the set configured in Terminals and Sets. Ensure
that you enter a unique DN for each ConneX user. Duplicating this number will cause problems when
two or more users, assigned the same DN, attempt to login simultaneously.
4. In System Programming set DRT to Prime to Y (system-wide setting – if this setting was performed
when setting up the Link then no action is required here).
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
265
Bridged Appearance– Remote Set Bridged to Desk Set
The incoming call will ring at both the desk set and at the remote set. The call will be dropped at the
unanswered set when answered at the other set.
The desk set that is bridged to the ConneX_Session port is configured as a normal set with no special
programming required. The Answer DN setting in the ConneX_Session programming handles the call
process for the bridge from the desk set. Voice mail should be configured on the desk set in this situation,
as per Norstar documentation.
Terminals and Sets
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enable Line Pool Access for outbound dialing.
Set Prime Line to I/C, with a minimum or 3 I/Cs assigned.
Set Answer DN to the DN of the appropriate desk set.
Set Foreward on No Answer and Forward on Busy to None.
Set Do Not Disturb on Busy to N.
Set Handsfree to None (allows for calls on Line 1 - **1, etc.).
Set Allow Redirect to Y and Redirect Ring to Y.
Lines
No settings specifically related to ConneX.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
266
Definity PBX ConneX Configuration
The instructions below are applicable for the configuration of Avaya’s DEFINITY ECS running release 3
or higher:
SCENARIO #1: Office Phone Used in Conjunction with the ConneX Phone
There is only one change required on the user’s office extension when he/she wishes to use the ConneX
phone as a complementary business tool. The number of rings should be increased to six (06) before
going into voicemail. This is required to allow enough time for the gateway to call the ConneX phone.
Note: No wiring changes are required on this extension.
Note: This extension MUST be capable of DID.
1. Perform a change station to modify the Coverage Path of the user’s office extension to allow it to
ring 6 times before going into voicemail. Tech Tip: Create a new Coverage Path in the DEFINITY to
accommodate this “class” of users.
2. Hit the Enter key on the number pad (far right of keyboard) to save the change made to this
extension.
Provisioning a New Extension for the ConneX Phone
1. Provision a new extension for the ConneX phone (Ch1) on the DEFINITY. Wire this extension into the
ConneX PBXgateway on an available port. Note: This extension does NOT require DID capability.
2. Go to Page 1 of the Definity terminal session to configure the CH1 extension.
3. Change Type to a DEFINITY phone set that supports the “analog adjunct” feature. We recommend
phone set 8411D, however other phones like the 6416D+ and 6424D+ also support the analog
adjunct feature. Notice the Data Option field appears in the middle of the screen when this change is
made. Tech Tip: It is NOT necessary for the phone type to match the type used at the office
extension, since only the first ten (10) line/feature buttons are accessible from a mobile phone.
4. Complete the Name field. Be sure to give this extension a clear name (i.e. ConneX Port 1).
5. Change Data Option to analog (notice the page number increases by 1 when this change is made).
6. Change the Message Lamp Ext to the user’s office extension.
7. Go to Page 2 and set Bridged Call Alerting to Y.
8. Go to Page 3 of the DEFINITY terminal session for this extension (Ch1).
9. On Page 3: Change all call-appr assigned buttons to brdg-appr → Btn: assignment # → Ext: Office
Extension.
Note: Program keys 0-9 on this extension to match the office phone’s keys 0-9. This is required to
make the features accessible from the mobile phone.
10 Go to last page (note: last page number may vary depending on phone model). Heading should read
Analog Adjunct.
11. On last page: Assign the Data Extension a new or unused extension (Ch2) on the DEFINITY. This
extension MUST be capable of DID. This is the extension number that the ConneX users will call to
access the RCX (DID of the Ch2). Ensure you use a different DID for each user as only one person
per DID can login. This will either be a DID extension, or accessible through a transfer from a main
number (i.e. Intuity, Vector, IVR,etc.).
12. Type in the extension Name. Give this extension a descriptive name so it is clear what it is being
used for (i.e. Username B2 - Mobile #1).
13. Hit the Enter key on the number pad (far right of keyboard) to save all changes made to extension
Ch1 and its now corresponding extension Ch2.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
267
14. Perform a display station on extension Ch1 to certify that all changes have been saved. Ensure that
all appearances are bridged to the office extension and that an Analog Adjunct to extension Ch2
exists.
15. Done. The DEFINITY PBX is now configured to support one user.
SCENARIO #2: Only ConneX Phone Is Used
Provisioning a new extension for the ConneX Phone.
1. Provision an extension for the ConneX phone (Ch1) on the DEFINITY. Wire this extension into the
RemoteConneX PBXgateway on an available port.
2. Go to Page 1 of the DEFINITY terminal session to configure the Ch1 extension.
3. Change Type to a DEFINITY phone set that supports the “analog adjunct” feature. We recommend
phone set 8411D, however other phone types like the 6416D+ and 6424D+ also support the analog
adjunct feature. Notice the Data Option field appears in the middle of the screen when this change is
made.
4. Enter the Name field. Be sure to give this extension a clear name (i.e. ConneX – Port 1).
5. Change Data Option to analog. Notice the page number increases by 1 when this change is made.
6. Go to last page (Note: last page number may vary depending on phone model). Heading should read
Analog Adjunct.
7. On last page: Assign the Data Extension a new or unused extension (Ch2) on the DEFINITY. This is
the extension number that the ConneX users will call to access RCX. Assign a different DID for each
user. Assigning the same DID for more then one user will create problems if two people, with the
same DID try to access the RCX IVR simultaneously. This will be either a DID extension, or
accessible through a transfer from a main number (i.e. Intuity, Vector, IVR,etc.).
8. Type in the extension Name. Give this extension a descriptive name so it is clear what it is being
used for (i.e. Username B2 - Mobile #1).
9. Set the call-appr field to Y.
10. Perform a display station on Ch1 extension to verify that all changes have been saved. And ensure
that an Analog Adjunct to the corresponding Ch2 extension exists.
11. Done. The DEFINITY PBX is now configured to support one user.
Meridian PBX ConneX Configuration
These instructions are applicable for the configuration of Nortel’s Meridian PBX running release 22 or
higher:
SCENARIO #1: Office Phone Used in Conjunction with the ConneX Phone
There is only one change required on the user’s office Terminal Number (TN) when he/she wishes to use
the ConneX phone as a complementary business tool. The number of rings should be increased to six
(06) before going into voicemail. This is required to allow enough time for the gateway to call the mobile
phone.
Note: No wiring changes are required on this TN.
1. On the Meridian maintenance terminal, go to >LD 15 (a.k.a. overlay) to change the (Call Redirection)
RDR_DATA field to YES and set (Call Forward No Answer) CFN2 to 6 rings.
2. Go to >LD 11 to CHG (Change) the (Ringing Cycle Option for Call Forward No Answer) ITEM RCO to
2 (for example RCO 2= the phone will ring six times before going into voicemail). Tech Tip: Create a
new RCO profile for mobile users. Six rings are recommended for this new profile.
3. On >LD 11, program a Ringing Pickup Group (RNPG) value for this TN when prompted.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
268
4. Set the Class of Service to Call Forward No Answer allowed (FNA) ITEM CLS to FNA.
5. Done. The office TN is configured to ring 6 times before going into voicemail.
Provisioning the Primary Voice Channel of the Mobile Phone’s TN – Ch1
1. Provision a new TN for the remote phone on the Meridian. Wire this TN into the RemoteConneX
PBXgateway on an available port. Note: This port does NOT require DID capability.
Tech Tip: Nortel’s Reach Line cards do no support the secondary channel required for the
RemoteConneX application.
2. On the Meridian maintenance terminal, use >LD 11 (a.k.a. overlay) to configure this TN to the same
Directory Number (DN) assigned to the user’s office phone.
3. Select a phone TYPE that supports Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA) functionality. We recommend
phone type M2616, however other Meridian phone sets that also support the ATA functionality are:
M2006, M2008, M2016, M2216 and M2617. Configure the selected phone with the same class of
service as the user’s office TN. Tech Tip: It is NOT necessary for the phone type to match the type
used at the office TN, since only the first ten (10) line/feature buttons are accessible from a mobile
phone.
WARNING: Do not configure a key as Message Waiting Key (MWK) for this TN to prevent
interference with voicemail and call routing functions.
4. On >LD 11, program this TN with the same RNPG value as the office TN when prompted.
5. Program KEY 00 to 9 to match the line keys of the office TN so that all inbound calls will ring at the
office and at the remote phones at the same time.
6. This TN must have a CLS of FLXD, CPTA, VCE, WTA.
7. Program any of the first 10 keys to allow A06 (Conference) & TRN (Transfer). Remember these
settings when programming the RemoteConneX PBXgateway.
Provisioning the Secondary Data Channel of the Mobile Phone’s TN – Ch2
1. On the Meridian maintenance terminal, use the >LD 11 to add Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA)
functionality to this TN. Refer to the Meridian 1 documentation for more details on programming an
ATA. Although no ATA adapter is used for the RemoteConneX application, the programming
required for the ATA applies to the remote phone’s TN configuration. The ATA functionality must be
added to this TN. Tech Tip: Nortel’s Reach Line cards do no support the secondary channel required
for the MobileConneX application.
2. This TN must have a CLS of FLXA, CPTD, VCE, WTA. Tech Tip: If Ch1 is “TN 3 0 5 0” (loop 3, shelf
0, card 5, unit 0), then Ch2 would be “TN 3 0 5 16”.
3. Program KEY 00 as Single Call Ringing SCR yyyy. The “yyyy” field should contain the Directory
Number (DN). The SCR appearance MUST be DID capable to allow the mobile user to dial the
Directory Number to access the corporate PBX.
6. Done. The Meridian 1 PBX is now configured to support one user.
SCENARIO #2: Only Mobile Phone Is Used
Provisioning the Primary Voice Channel of the Mobile Phone’s TN – Ch1
1. Provision a TN for the remote phone on the Meridian 1. Wire this TN into the MobileConneX
PBXgateway on an available port. Note: This port must be DID capable. Tech Tip: Nortel’s Reach
Line cards do no support the secondary channel required for the MobileConneX application.
2. On the Meridian maintenance terminal, use >LD 11 (i.e. overlay) to configure this TN.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
269
3. Select a phone TYPE that supports Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA) functionality. We recommend
phone type M2616, however other Meridian phone sets that support the ATA functionality are:
M2006, M2008, M2016, M2216, and M2617. Configure the selected phone according to the
company’s standard class of service.
4. Program KEY 00 as SCR (Single Call Ringing). This TN must have a CLS of FLXD, CPTA, VCE,
WTA.
5. Assign a voicemail box for this TN.
WARNING: Do not configure a key as Message Waiting Key (MWK) for this TN to prevent
interference with voicemail and call routing functions.
6. Program any of the first 10 keys to allow A06 (Conference) & TRN (Transfer). Remember these
settings when programming the RemoteConneX PBXgateway.
Provisioning the Secondary Data Channel of the Mobile Phone’s TN – Ch2
1. On the Meridian maintenance terminal, use the >LD 11 to add Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA)
functionality to this TN. Refer to Meridian 1 documentation for more details on programming an ATA.
Although no ATA adapter is used for the RemoteConneX application, the programming required for
the ATA device applies to the mobile phone’s TN configuration. The ATA functionality must be added
to the Ch2 channel. Tech Tip: Nortel’s Reach Line cards do no support the secondary channel
required for the MobileConneX application.
2. This TN must have a CLS of FLXA, CPTD, VCE, WTA. Tech Tip: If Ch1 is “TN 3 0 5 0” (loop 3,
shelf 0, card 5, unit 0), then Ch2 would be “TN 3 0 5 16”.
3. Program KEY 00 as Single Call Ringing SCR yyyy. The “yyyy” field should contain the Directory
Number (DN). The SCR appearance MUST be DID capable to allow the mobile user to dial the
Directory Number to access the corporate PBX.
4. Done. The Meridian 1 PBX is now configured to support one user.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
270
Example for Scenario #1 – Programming the Primary Voice Channel (Ch1)
TN
DATE
PAGE
DES
TN
TYPE
CDEN
CUST
AOM
FDN
TGAR
LDN
NCOS
SGRP
RNPG
SCI
SSU
XLST
CLS
002
0
00
13
VAL
002
0
00
09
2616
8D
0
0
Enter voicemail box number (optional)
1
NO
0
0
0
0
CTD
FBD
WTA
LPR
MWA
LMPN
RMMD SMWD
POD
DSX
VMD
CMSD
CFTD
SFD
MRD
DDV
ICDD
CDMD MCTD
CLBD
GPUD
DPUD
DNDD
CFXD
CPFA
CPTA
ABDD
CFHD
DDGA
NAMA
DRDD
EXR0
USRD
ULAD
RTDD
RBDD
CPND_LANG
ENG
HUNT
Enter voicemail box number (optional)
LHK
0
PLEV
Message Waiting Allowed
(MWA) is required.
The required Class of Service
is bold.
MTD
AAD
CCSD
CNID
AUTU
ARHD
FICD
FND
IMD
SWD
CDCA
HTD
XHD
LND
MSID
ADD
IRD
CNDD
DAPA
CLTD
NAID
ASCD
BUZZ
AHD
RBHD
OCBD
FLXD
FTTC
02
HFD
NID
OLD
BFED
RCBD
VCE
DRG1
Directory Number (DN) for office
and remote phones must be the
same
AST
IAPG
0
AACS
NO
ITNA
NO
DGRP
MLWU_LANG
DNDR
0
KEY
00
01
02
03
04
05
Does not have to be specific keys.
However, the keys utilized for Transfer and
Conference must be entered in the
RemoteConneX PBXgateway.
0
SCR
2009
TRN
AO6
(Transfer)
(Conference)
Figure 100:
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
0
Programming the Primary Voice Channel (CH1)
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
271
Example for Scenario #1 – Programming the Secondary Data Channel (Ch2)
TYPE:
TN
DATE
PAGE
DES
TN
TYPE
CDEN
CUST
AOM
FDN
TGAR
LDN
NCOS
SGRP
RNPG
SCI
SSU
XLST
CLS
TYPE
002
B2
002
2616
8D
0
0
2616
0
00
29
0
00
25
The required Classes of Service are
bolded. The new CLS options should be
entered in REVERSE order (i.e. VCE and
WTA).
1
NO
0
0
0
0
CTD
FBD
MWD
LMPN
POD
DSX
CFTD
SFD
ICDD
CDMD
GPUD
DPUD
CPFA
CPTD
DDGA
NAMA
DRDD
EXR0
USRD
ULAD
CPND_LANG
HUNT
PLEV
02
AST
IAPG
0
AACS
NO
ITNA
NO
DGRP
MLWU_LANG
DNDR
0
DTMK
KEY
00
01
02
03
WTA
RMMD
VMD
MRD
MCTD
DNDD
ABDD
LPR
SMWD
CMSD
DDV
CLBD
CFXD
CFHD
MTD
AAD
CCSD
CNID
AUTU
ARHD
FICD
FND
IMD
SWD
CDCA
HTD
XHD
LND
MSID
ADD
IRD
CNDD
DAPA
CLTD
NAID
ASCD
BUZZ
AHD
RTDD
ENG
RBDD
RBHD
OCBD
FLXA
FTTC
HFD
NID
OLD
BFED
RCBD
VCE
DRG1
A DID number (i.e. 270-4726) can be used
when calling into the CH2 directly. Another
way to reach the Ch2 is by calling the main
toll-free number, if available, and dialing
the specific extension for the Ch2 (i.e.
4726)
0
SCR
4726
Figure 101:
0
MARP
Programming the Secondary Data Channel (CH2) Example
Note: Both of these examples also apply for Scenario#2 as well.
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
272
Index
2
2 for 1 Configuration
Remote unit configuration, 88
A
Access Interactive Voice Response (IVR), 251
Active Call Menu, 255
Address parameter, 127
Alarm Log-Viewing, 234
Analog Card (G) & (B), 199
Async Parameters
setting, 74
Async Rate parameter, 75, 127
Asynchronous transmission, 12
asynchronous-serial, 16
Auto Connect parameter, 127
B
Banner parameter, 128
Begin Test (IP) parameter, 128
Begin Test (WAN) parameter, 128
Branch Office Unit Checklist, 147
C
Call Suspend
Remote Only Wakeup-Disabled, 20
Remote Only Wakeup-Enabled, 20
Call Suspend feature, 19
Clear Log parameter, 128
Command Keys, 52
Community parameter, 129
compatible remote units, 11, 40
conference, 251
Conference (Conf), 256
Configuration File Management, 173
Connect Menu (R), 199
Connecting the EXTender 6000 Remote Unit, 41
Connecting the Remote Unit, 40
Connections to the Network Device, 37
ConneX Application, Disable/Re-enable, 249
ConneX Application, What is, 246
ConneX Application, Why use it, 246
ConneX Information, personal, 245
ConneX Mobile Application Commands DEFINITY, 251
Console Baud parameter, 129
Console Setup Wizard, 103
D
DCE_type parameter, 74
Diagnostics Menu, 208
Dial Prefix parameter, 75
Dialback, 254
Dialback Modes, 247
Dialback Number (DN, 247
Dialback Number, Set/Modify (Roaming Only),
249
digital telephone features, 18
Direct Console Connection, 179
Disabled, 248
Do Not Disturb (DND), 251
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
Drop a Call (Drop)
TM
(Used with DEFINITY
ONLY),
256
E
Echo Problems, 161
EXTender 4000, 11, 40
EXTender 4000 Unit Checklist, 148
EXTender 6000, 11, 40, 103
EXTender Window, 46
F
fax traffic, 22
Feature Softkeys, 255
features
digital telephone, 18
PBXgateway, 11
Fixed, 248
Fixed/Forced, 248
Flash, 255
front panel, 30
FTP Connection, 176
G
Gateway parameter, 132
H
Hardware Components, 30
Hold, 251
Hold (Hold), 256
Hook Flash, 251
HTML configuration, 46
EXTender Window, 46
LED Definitions, 46
HTML interface, 46
I
Idle Menu, 255
Installation, 34
Internet Protocol, 12
IP, 12
IP Connection-testing, 159
IP Menu, 203
IP/RVP_IP, 147
ISDN SPID 1 parameter, 75
ISDN SPID 2 parameter, 75
ISDN Switch Type parameter, 75
J
Jitter, 64
Jitter and Compression
Setting, 64
L
LEDs, 152, 153
Local Dialing Num1 parameter, 75
Local Dialing Num2 parameter, 75
Log Menu, 202
Log Messages, 239
Log Priorities, 240
Long Tones 808, 253
M
Main Menu, 195
Management Information Base, 218
Management Interface (MI), 25
273
Management Interface (MI) Connections, 45
Management Interface (MI) Status Menus, 162
Menu Components, 51
message log, 239
MI Parameter
Default Router, 129
DNS, 130
DTMF, 130
Edit Config, 131
Free Space, 131
Image List, 132
Jitter Delay, 133
Method (Voice), 134
MSB Key, 135
Optimize, 135
Packet Size, 135
Packey Trace, 135
Password (Admin), 139
Password (Connect), 136
Port Matching, 137
Primary Interface, 137
Secondary Interface, 139
Utilization, 143
Voice (Path), 136
MI Parameters, 127
Address, 127
Async Rate, 75, 127
Auto Connect, 127
Banner, 128
Begin Test (IP), 128
Begin Test (WAN), 128
Clear Log, 128
Community, 129
Console Baud, 129
DCE_type, 74
Dial Prefix, 75
Gateway, 132
ISDN SPID 1, 75
ISDN SPID 2, 75
ISDN Switch Type, 75
Local Dialing Num1, 75
Local Dialing Num2, 75
Telnet, 141
MIB Group Tables, 221
MIB-Installing Files, 231
MIB-Management Information Base, 218
mounting PBX, 36
multiple remote users, 11
N
Network Checklist, 147
network connections
types of, 12
network devices, 37
network types
ATM, 11
Fractional T1, 11
IP, 11
ISDN, 11
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
Next LN, 255
Number of Users, 210
O
Off Hook (get PBX dialtone), 251
P
Password, Assigning a ConneX Password, 249
password-Setting Community Password, 232
PBX dialtone, 249
PBXgateway features, 11
PBXgateway Unit Checklist, 147
Phone-Set Interface, 213
physical characteristics, 24
Port Menu, 196
Port Status LEDs, 153
Power Up Checklist, 42
Power Up Sequence, 150
Printing, 46
R
RCX login Procedure, 254
rear panel, 30
Remote Phone Messages, 170
Remote Voice Protocol, 12
Requirements, 31
Roaming, 248
RVP. See Remote Voice Protocol
RVP_Direct Menu (R), 200
RVP_over_IP Menu (R), 201
S
Set Date Menu, 207
SetDB, 255
Setting Jitter and Compression, 64
Setting the Async Parameters, 74
Setup Wizard
for console, 103
for telephone, 103
Silence Detection, 64
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
parameter, 217
single remote users, 11
SNMP
SysContact, 140
SysLocation, 141
Trap Host, 141
Trap Path, 142
Trap Priority, 142
SNMP Menu, 204
SNMP Set up, 231
SNMP to monitor problems, 235
Specifications, 27
Synchronous Serial/RVP_Direct, 147
Synchronous transmission, 12
synchronous-serial, 15
Syslog Menu, 204
System Info, 169
System Menu, 205
System Status LEDs, 152
274
T
TCP/UDP Requirements, 61
Telnet, 47
Telnet parameter, 141
TERMINAL SETTINGS, 48
ToS (type of service) byte, 92
Transfer, 251
Transfer (Xfer), 256
Trap, 218
Trap Customization, 232
Trap Host-Configuration, 232
Trap-Defining a Fatal Trap, 233
Trap-Defining a Warning Trap, 233
Trap-Defining an Error Trap, 233
Trap-Defining an Info Trap, 234
Troubleshooting Procedure, 155
Uploading Files to Flash, 176
Utilities Menu, 206
V
VMStat, 255
Voice Compression, 211
voice compression vs. bandwidth, 23
Voice Menu, 197
Voice over IP, 17
Voice Quality Expectations, 160
Voicemail Status, 251
VoIP, 12
W
WAN Connection- External, 178
WAN Connection-testing, 157
WAN Menu, 198
web browser interface, 46
Welcome Screen, 48
U
Upgrading Firmware, 181
TM
PBXgateway™ & EXTender
6000 System Administrator’s Guide
275
Download PDF